TM 11-5820-398-35

TM 11-5820-398-35
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL MANUAL
FIELD AND DEPOT

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RADIO SET AN/PRC-25
T h i s c o p y i s a r e p r i n t w h i c h i n c l u d e s c u r r e n t
p a g e s f r o m C h a n g e s 1 a n d 2 .
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

8 JANUARY 1963
WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST IN THIS EQUIPMENT
When Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25

is in a transmit condition, 45 volts dc and 125 volts
dc are generated in module Al and applied to trans-
mitter power amplifier V1. The 45-volt potential is
also applied to modules A6 and A7. Take all necessary
precautions.
DON’T TAKE CHANCES!

CAUTION
This equipment is transistorized. Before connecting
test equipment within the modules, insulate test prods
and clips with insulating tape or sleeving. Leave an
absolute minimum of exposed metal, and be extremely
careful to avoid short circuits; they may cause exten-
sive damage. Do not make resistance measurements
unless specifically directed to do so.
TM 5820-396-35-CI-9
Figure 5.1.
2
TM5820-398-35-CI-4
Figure 7.1.
5
TM5820-398-35-CI-2
Figure 22.1.
7
Changes in force C 1 and C 2
TM 11-5820-398-35
C 2
C HANGE HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 2 W ASHINGTON , D. C., 22 April 1965
Field and Depot Maintenance Manual

RADIO SET AN/PRC-25
TM 11-5820-398-35, 8 January 1963, is changed Page 11, figure 3 (page 1 of C 1). After note 5,
as follows: add note 6.
Note. The parenthetical reference to previous changes 6. IN LATER EQUIPMENT BEARING ORDER NO.
(example: page 1 of C 1) indicates that pertinent material wae 64009-PP-63, R4 IS 68 0HM3 AND A MODULE
published in that change. GROUND STRAP HAS BEEN ADDED.
Page 3, paragraph 1.1 (page 1 of C 1). Change
“AMSEL-MR-MP” to: AMSEL-MR-(NMP)-
Page 14, figure 5.1 (page 2 of C 1). Make the
MA.
following changes:
Page 7, paragraph 6b(l), line 3. Change (fig. 1)
to (fig. 88). Near R12, add (NOTE 4).
Page 10, figure 2 (page 1 of C 1). After note 5, After note 3, add note 4:
add note 6. 4. IN LATER EQUIPMENT BEARING ORDER NO.
6. IN LATER EQUIPMENT BEARING ORDER NO. 64009-PP-63, THE VALUE OF R12 HAS BEEN
64009-PP-63, CAPACITOR C2 HAS BEEN FACTORY SELECTED AND MAY BE 37.4K,
OMITTED. 38.3K, OR 39.2K ±1%.
TAGO 8344-A-April 1
Page 20. figure 10.1 figure 10
TM5820-398-35-C2-1
Figure 10.1.
2
Page 43, paragraph 36a, (page 8 of C 1) chart. Page 91, paragraph 63c, chart, P e r f o r m a n c e
Delete the last line and substitute: RF Millivolt- slandard column. Make the following changes:
meter, Hewlett-Packard Model HP411A. Step No. 1d: Change 300 kc to 250 kc.
Page 56, figure 31. Add the following note: 1g: Delete and substitute—l?requency should
Note. ON EQUIPMENT BEARING ORDER NO. be at least 250 kc below 31.50 mc. The
64009-PP-63, SWITCHES S2 AND S3 HAVE BEEN difference between the upper and lower
OMITTED. frequency indications should be at least
Page 60, paragraph 44, heading. After the head- 650 kc.
ing, add the following note.
Note. On equipment bearing Order No. 64009-PP-63, Page 105, paragraph 67, chart, P e r f o r m a n c e
switches S2 and S3 are omitted. Removal of module Al 1, standard column. Make the following changes:
A17, A19, or A20 provides the same result as depressing Item la, b, and c: Change 2 to 1.6.
switches S2 and S3. ld, e, and f: Change 1.5 to 1.1.
Page 71, paragraph 56c chart, P e r f o r m a n c e 8a and b: Change 300 to 250.
standard column. Make the following changes: After Item 8, add the following note.
Step No. 1: Change 2 watts to 1.6 watts. Note. The difference between the two frequency
2: Change 1,5 watts to 1.1 watts. indications should be at least 650 kc.
TAGO 8344-A 3
Page 124, figure 61. Add figure 61.1 after figure 61:
Figure 61.1.
4 TAGO 8344-A
Page 151. Add chapter 6 after figure 79:
CHAPTER 6
DEPOT INSPECTION STANDARDS
98. Applicability of Depot Inspection Stand- (2) TM 11-5820-398-20, Organizational Main-

ards tenance Manual.
The tests outlined in this chapter are designed (3) TM 11-5820-398-35P, Field and Depot
to measure the performance and capability of a Maintenance Repair Parts and Special
repaired Radio Set AN/PRC–2.5. Equipment that Tools List.
meets the minimum standards stated in the tests (4) TM 11-5820-497-35P, Field and Depot
will furnish satisfactory operation, equivalent to Maintenance Repair Parts and Special
that of new equipment. Tools List, Receiver-Transmitters, Radio
RT-505/PRC-25 and RT-505A/PRC-25.
c. Modification Work Orders. Perform all applica-
99. Applicable References
ble Modification Work Orders pertaining to Radio
a. Repair Standards. Applicable procedures of Set AN/PRC-25 before making the tests specified.
the U.S. Army depot performing this test, and the DA Pam 310-4 lists all available MWO’s.
depot standards for repaired signal equipment, form
a part of the requirements for testing this equipment. 100. Test Facilities Required
b. Technical Publications. The following technical The following equipment, or suitable equivalents,
publications are applicable to Radio Set AN/PRC- will be employed in determining compliance with the
25: requirements of this Specific Standard.
(1) TM 11-5820-398-10, Operator’s Manual. a. Test Equipment.
Equipment Federal stock No. Technical manual.

Audio oscillator, Hewlett-Packard Model HP-200AB -------------------- 6625-519-2384 1
Signal Generator, F. M., Marconi Model 1066A -------------------------- ------------- 1
Voltmeter, Meter ME-30A/U ------------------------------------------ 6625-669-0742 1 TM 11-6625-320-12
Frequency Meter AN/USM-26----------------------------------------- 6625–692-6553 1 TM 11-5057
Spectrum Analyzer TS-723A/U ----------------------------------------- 6625-668-9418 1 TM 11-5097
Oscilloscope AN/USM-50A -------------------------------------------- 6625-668-4676 1 TM 11-5129
Modulation Meter ME-57/U-------------------------------------------------------- 6625-647-3737 1 TM 11-6625-400-12
Multimeter ME-26B/U ----------------------------------------------- 6625-542-6407 1 TM 11-6625-200-12
RF Wattmeter AN/URM-43A ----------------------------------------- 6625-635-9186 1 TM 11-5133
Signal Generator AN/USM-44----------------------------------------- 6625-669-4031 1 TM 11-6625-508-10
RF Millivoltmeter Hewlett-Packard Model HP-411A --------------------- ------------- 1
Power Supply, Trygon Model T20-2------------------------------------ ------------- 2
b. Additional Equipment.
Federal stock No. o
Enclosure, Electromagnetic, Shielding MX-1761/C ------------------------------------------ 4940-542-0002 1
Tool Kit, Radar and Radio Repairman TK-87/U -------------------------------------------- 5180-690-4452 1
Test Assembly, consisting of: (See fig. 79.6 for fabrication details.)
Lamp, indicator, with push-to-test feature, 12 volts -------------------------------------- ------------- 1
Connector, Methode Type No. SM-C-454687------------------------------------------- ------------- 1
Resistor, 150 ohms ±5%, 1 watt, fixed, composition ------------------------------------- 5905-683-2243 1
Resistor, 1,000 ohms ±1%, 1 watt, fixed, composition ------------------------------------ 5905-892-6330 1
Resistor, 10,000 ohms ±5% variable, linear taper, composition ---------------------------- 5905-892-6542 1
Resistor, 15,000 ohms ±5%, 1 watt, fixed, composition ----------------------------------- 5905-102-2824 1
TAGO 8344-A 5
Equipment
Switch, tig~e, singl&pole, singl~throw ------------------------------------------------- 5930-65%1517 1

Barrier terminal biock, Cinch Jones type No. 2-172-Y (2 terminal) ----------------------- ------------- 1
Barrier terminal block, Cinch Jones type No. 8-172-Y (8 tirminak)----------------------- ------------- 1
Cable, coaxial, type RG-WA/U ------------------------------------------------------- 6145-542-6092 8 ft
W&, strmded AWGNo. l8---------------------------------------------------------- 6145-160-5291 16 ft
Knob, control ----------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- 1
Chassis, aluminum (5 in. by 9% in. by 2 in. suggested nominal size) ------------------------ ------------- 1
Receiver Dummy Antenna consisting of: (See fig. 79.4 for fabrication details.)
Resistor, 51.1 ohms +l~o, 1 watt, deposited carbon -------------------------------------- 5905-722-1804 1
Reaistor,31.6 ohms *lVO, 1 watt, deposihd carbon -------------------------------------- 5905-722-1805 1
Connector UG-657/U ---------------------------------------------------------------- 5935-511-6618 2
Adapkr, Connector UG+91A/U ------------------------------------------------------ 5935-259-7463 1
A1utinum container 2%in. by2~in. byl~ in----------------------------------------- ------------- 1
Wlm, strmded AWGNo. l8---------------------------------------------------------- 6145-160-5291 As
reauired
Transmitter Dummy Loads (See fig. 79.5 for fabrication details. )
Long Antenna Loads for the specified frequencies as follows:
30.0 me—Resistor, 130 ohms +lVO, 1 watt, deposited carbon ---------------------------- 5905-060-4153 1
52.5 me-Resistor, 6190hms +1%, 1 watt, deposited carbon ---------------------------- 5905-581-1009 1
53.5 me—Resistor, 4000hms *lVO, 1 watt, deposited carbon ---------------------------- 5905-818-7164 1
—Capacitor,8MJf &5704Wvdc --------------------------------------------- ------------- 1
75.Omc—Resistor, 82 ohms +170, 1 watt, deposited carbon ----------------------------- 5905-655-3881 1
—Capacitor,68ppf +5%, 4~vdc -------------------------------------------- 5910-615-9812 1
Short Antenna Loads for the specified frequencies SE follows:
30.0 me—Resistor, 26.1 ohms +1’ZO, 1 watt, deposited carbon --------------------------- 5905-059-8157 1
—Capacitor, 12ppf +5%, 400vdc -------------------------------------------- 5910-806-2716 1
52.5 mc and 53.3 mc
—Resistor, 56.2 ohms +270, 1 watt, deposited carbon --------------------------- 5905-817-6049 1
—Capacitor, 18~pf +5vo,400 vdc-------------------------------------------- 5910-823-1971 1
75.0 me—Resistor, 61.9 ohms +1%, 1 watt, deposited carbon --------------------------- 5905-756-0425 1
—Capacitor,82ppf &5~,400 vdc-------------------------------------------- 5910-553-7147 1
Adapters, Antenna Load (See fig. 79.5 for fabrication details.)
No. l------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------_- 1
No. 2------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ------------- 1
Adaptir, ``T'', UG-274/U ----------------------------------------------------------------- 5935-201-2411 1
Attenuator, Adjustable “T”, General Radio type GR-874-GA --------------------------------- ------------- 1
Decoupling Tool; sheet metal 1 in. by 4 in., by 0.018 in. to 0.035 in. (20 to 26 gage) -------------- ------------- 1
Test Gable No. 1, (fig. 79.1) consisting of: -----------_- 1
Clip, electrical, alligator style ---------------------------------------------------------- 5940-18&9835 1
Plug, pin(tist lead probe) ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------- 1
Wire, stranded AWGNo. l8---------------------------------------------------------- 6145-160-5291 6 in.
Test Cable No. 2 (fig. 79.1) consisting of: ------------- 2
Cable RG-MA/U -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6145-542-6092 6 ft
Connector UG-88/U ----------------------------------------------------------------- 5935-149-4066 2
Connector, General Wdiotype GR-874-C58A ------------------------------------------ ------------- 2
Cable RG-WA/U -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6145-542-6092 3 ft
Connector UG-21BlU ---------------------------------------------------------------- 5935-149-4236 1
Connector, General Radio type GR-874-C58A ------------------------------------------ -----------_- 1
Cable RG-WA/U -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6145-542-6092 16 ft
Lugs, spade ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- 16
Teat Cable No. 5 (fig. 79.2) consisting of: ------------- 1
Cable R&58A/U -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6145-542-6092 3 ft
Connecter UG-88/U ----------------------------------------------------------------- 5935-149-4066 1
Lu~, spade ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- 2
Teat Cable No. 6 (fig. 79.2) consisting of: ------------- 1
Cable RG-58A/U -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6145-542-6092 3 ft
Connector UG-88/U ----------------------------------------------------------------- 5935-1494066 1
Insulating Terminal Board, 1 in. by2in. by%b in---------------------------------------- ------------- 1
Resistor, 15,0000hms +5Vo, lwatt ---------------------------------------------------- 5905-537-6458 1
6 TAGO .9344A
Eguipmenf ,d?rd dock No. %%2
Capacitor, O.05pf +10To,4M vdc----------------------------------------------------- ------------- 1
Wire, stranded AWGNo. l8---------------------------------------------------------- 6145-160-5291 As
required
Lu~, spade ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- 2
Wire, stranded AWGNo. l8---------------------------------------------------------- 6145-160-5291 16 ft
Lu@, spade ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- 8
Teat Cable No. 8 (fig. 79.3) conaieting of: ------------- 1
Cable RG-WA/U -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6145-542-6092 3 ft
Insulating Terminal Board, 1 in. by2 in. by lA in---------------------------------------- ------------- 1
Capacitor, O.l~f +10Yc,400 vdc------------------------------------------------------5910-161-5264 1
Wire, stranded AWG No. l8---------------------------------------------------------- 6145-16(F5291 Aa
required
Lu@, spade ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- 4
Cable, RG-@A/U ------------------------------------------------------------------- 6145-542-6092 6 ft
Connectors, UG-W/U ---------------------------------------------------------------- 5935-149-4236 4
Hm&t H-138/U ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 5965-892-0972 1
Figure 79.1. Test cables No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3.

TAOO 8344-A 7
Figure 79.2. Test cables No. 4, No.5, and No.6.
8 TAGO 8344-A
Figure 79.3. Test cables No. 7, No. 8, and No. 9.
TACO 8344-A 9
Figure 79.4. Receiver dummy antenna, schematic
and wiring diagrame.
10 TAGO 8344-A
Figure 79.5.
11
TACO 8344-A
Figure 79.6. Test assembly, schematic/wiring diagram.
12 TAGO 8344A
101. General Test Requirements b. Connect a test cable No. 7 from ground of
Most of the tests will he performed under the power supply A (2.5 volts) to terminal D of test
conditions listed below and illustrated in figure 79.7 assembly terminal board TB1.
(for the receiver system tests) and in figure 79.8 (for c. Connect a test cable No. 7 from the positive
the transmitter system tests). Testing will be output of power supply A (2.5 volts) to terminal E
simplified if preliminary standard control settings of test assembly terminal board TB1.
are made initially and changes from these settings d. Connect a test cable No. 7 from ground of
are then made as required for the individual tests. power supply B (12.5 volts) to terminal D of test
Perform all tests in Enclosure, Electromagnetic assembly terminal board TB1.
Shielding MX-1761/C (or equivalent). Do not e. Connect a test cable No. 7 from the positive
apply power to the equipment under test until all output of power supply B (12.5 volts) to terminal F
test connections are made and the power supply of test assembly terminal board TB 1.
output voltages are set. f. Connect a test cable No. 4 from the AF input
Caution: When adjusting the power supply terminal of TS-723A/U (shield to ground) to
output voltages, do not exceed 3 volts and 15 volts. terminals C and D (shield) of test assembly terminal
a. Remove the shorting cap from POWER con- board TB1.
nector J3 on the front panel of the RT-505/PRC-25. g. Connect a test cable No. 4 from the audio
b. Loosen and disengage the four captive screws input terminals to the meter terminals of the TS-
that hold the case to the front panel of RT-505/ 723A/U.
PRC-25. Remove the case. h. Connect a test cable No. 4 from the af input
c. Connect the RT-505/PRC-25 into the appli- terminals of the TS-723A/U to the vertical input
cable test setup (fig. 79.7 for receiver system tests of the AN/USM-50A.
and fig. 79.8 for transmitter system tests). i. Connect the receiver dummy antenna to the
RT–505/PRC-25 coaxial ANT jack J2. Use
d. Apply power to the RT-505/PRC-25 and
Adapter, Connector UG-491A/U for connection to
allow sufficient stabilization (warmup) time for the
ANT jack J2.
test equipment. Five minutes is adequate for the
j. Connect test cable No. 9 from the receiver
RT-505/PRC-25.
dummy antenna to the 1066A RF input.
e. All specified signal levels apply to the signal at k. Connect test cable No. 8 from the 1066A
the RT-505/PRC-25 input and not at the signal external modulation input to the HP-200AB
generator output. The dummy load used in the audio output.
receiver test setup reduces the rf voltage delivered
l. Connect test cable No. 5 from the HP-200AB
at the coaxial ANT connector to half of the signal
audio output to the AN/USM-26 signal input.
generator output attenuator setting (6 db loss).
m. Do not turn on the RT-505/PRC-25. Turn on
f. The oscilloscope used in test setups is included
all test equipment and allow sufficient warmup time.
for the convenience of maintenance personnel, but
is not necessary to perform the tests. It provides a n. Adjust power supply A to 2.5 volts and power
convenient output indication for both receiver and Supply B to 12.5 volts.
transmitter tests. o. Set the RT-505/PRC-25 function switch to
g. ln all receiver tests, set the signal Generator ON and select a frequency of 41.00 mc. Allow 5
F. M. Marconi Model 1066A (1066A) frequency to minutes to warmup.
produce minimum distortion (as read on the TS- p. Adjust the 1066A to produce an RF output of
723A/U) before making any readings. 41.00 mc at a 20-microvolt level with 10-kc de-
h. To avoid audio ground loops, do not ground viation at 1,000-cps modulation frequency.
Note. The dummy antenna used in series with the 1066A
Audio Oscillator Hewlett-Packard Model HP-200AB output provides 6 db of attenuation. The actual RF level
(HP-200AB) output to the common ground at any delivered at the RT-505/PRC-25 coaxial ANT input is
point. 10 microvolt when the 1066A output attenuator is set to
20 microvolt.
102. Receiver Test Setup q. Adjust the RT-505/PRC-25 VOLUME con-
(fig. 79.7) trol to produce a l-volt reading on the TS-723A/U
a. Plug the test assembly connector PL into (used as a vacuum-tube voltmeter).
POWER connector J3 on the front panel of the V. Perform the receiver system tests indicated in
RT-505/PRC-25. paragraph 104.
TAGO 8344-A 13
Figure 79.7.
14 TAGO 8344-A
103. Transmitter Test Setup on the test assembly and the HP-200AB output
(fig. 79.8) level to produce a 1.4-millivolt reading on the
a. Plug the test assembly connector into POWER ME-30A/U.
connector J3 on the front panel of the RT–505/ s. Perform the transmitter system tests indicated
PRC-25. in paragraph 105.
b. Connect a test cable No. 7 from ground of
104. Receiver System Tests, Radio Set AN/
power supply A (2.5 volts) to terminal D of test
PRC-25
assembly terminal board TB1.
c. Connect a test cable No. 7 from the positive a. Sensitivity Test.
output of power supply A (2.5 volts) to terminal E (1) Perform the sensitivity test with the
of test assembly terminal board TB1. equipment connected in a standard re-
d. Connect a test cable No. 7 from ground of ceiver test setup (para 102 and fig. 79.7),
power supply B (12.5 volts) to terminal D of test except set the RF signal level at the RT-
assembly terminal board TB1. 505 /PRC-25 coaxial ANT input to 0.6
e. Connect a test cable No. 7 from the positive microvolt.
output of powersupply B (12.5 volts) to terminal F (2) Measure the signal-plus-noise-plus-distor-
of test assembly terminal board TB1. tion to noise-plus-distortion ratio on the
f. Connect a test cable No.4 from the HP-200AB TS-723A/U, and record. The ratio should
audio output to test assembly terminals A and B be at least 10 db.
(shieId) of terminal board TB1. (3) Adjust power supply A to 2.25 volts,
g. Connect test cable No. 4 from the ME-30A/U power supply B to 10.0 volts, and repeat
input to test assembly terminals A and B (shield) the procedure given in (2) above.
of terminal board TB 1. (4) Adjust power supply A to 3.0 volts, power
h. Connect a test cable No. 2 from coaxial ANT supply B to 15 volts, and repeat the pro-
jack J2 of the RT-505/PRC-25 to the input of the cedures given in (2) above.
Attenuator, Adjustable “T”, General Radio Type (5) Repeat the procedures given in (2), (3), and
GR-874-GA (adjustable attenuator). (4) above at 65 mc.
i. Connect test cable ATO. 3 from the unattenuated (6) Repeat the procedure given in (2) above
output of the adjustable attenuator to the input at 30.00, 52.00, 53.00, and 75.95 mc.
of the AN/URM-43A. b. Distortion, Audio Power Output, Volume Con-
j. Connect a test cable No. 2 from the attenuated trol, and Audio Frequency Response Tests.
output of the adjustable attenuator to the ME-57/U (1) Perform these tests with the equipment
input through adapter UG-274/U. connected in a standard receiver test
k. Connect test cable 9 from the AN/USM-26 setup (para 102 and fig. 79.7).
input, through adapter UG-274/U, to the ME- (2) Measure the percentage of distortion on
57/U input. the TS-723A/U. Maximum allowable
l. Connect a test cable No. 4 from the ME-57/U distortion is 6 percent.
audio output to the TS-723A/U input. (3) Adjust the VOLUME control on RT-505/
m. Connect a test cable No. 4 from the ME-57/U PRC-25 to produce a 2-volt reading on
audio output to the AN/USM-50A vertical input. the TS-723A/U (used as a vacuum-tube
n. Connect a test cable No. 4 from the audio input voltmeter).
terminals to the meter terminals of the TS-723A/U. (4) Measure the percentage of distortion on
o. Do not turn on RT-505/PRC-25. Turn on the TS-723A/U. Maximum allowable
all test equipment and allow sufficient warmup distortion is 10 percent.
time. (5) Set the VOLUME control on the RT-505/
PRC-25 fully clockwise. The output
p. Adjust power supply A to 2.5 volts and power
indicated on the TS-723A/U (used as a
supply B to 12.5 volts. vacuum-tube voltmeter) should be at
q. Set the RT-505/PRC-25 function switch to least 2 volts.
ON and select a frequency of 41.00 mc. Allow 5 (6) Set the VOLUME control on RT-505/
minutes to warmup. PRC-25 fully counterclockwise and dis-
r. Adjust the HP-200AB to 1,000 cps. Adjust the connect the RF output cable from the
TRANSMITTER AUDIO INPUT LEVEL control 1066A. The output indicated on the TS-
TAGO 8344-A 15
Figure 79.8.
16 TAGO 8344-A
723A/U (used as a vacuum-tube voltmeter) (7) Restore the HP-200AB ATTENUATOR
should be not greater than 0.02 volt. setting to the position determined as noted
(7) Reestablish the standard receiver test in (4) above.
conditions; use the HP-200AB to externally (8) Set the RT-505/PRC-25 function switch
modulate the 1066A. to RETRANS. The test assembly RE-
(8) Without changing the RT-505/PRC-25 TRANSMIT lamp should light and the
VOLUME control setting, determine the TS-723A/U (used as a vacuum-tube volt-
receiver audio output level produced with meter) should indicate receiver audio
modulation frequencies of 300, 500, 2,000, output. The RETRANSMIT lamp pro-
and 3,000 cps (at 10-kc deviation). Ac- vides a convenient method of monitoring
ceptable frequency response is +0, – 6 db operation of the squelch circuit.
(from the 1,000-cps reference) at 300 cps, (9) Momentarily set the RT-505/PRC-25
and +3, –6 db at 500,2,000, and 3,000 cps. function switch to OFF then back to
c. Limiting Test RETRANS to verify that the receiver will
(1) Perform the limiting test with the equip- unsquelch (RETRANSMIT lamp lighted)
ment connected in a standard receiver test with an RF input level of 0.5 microvolt.
setup (para 102 and fig. 79.7), except set the (l0) Slowly decrease the RF input level at the
RF signal level at the RT-505/PRC-25 RT-505/PRC-25 coaxial ANT input to
coaxial ANT input to 1 microvolt. 0.35 microvolt. The receiver should re-
(2) Adjust the 1066A frequency for minimum main unsquelched.
distortion as checked on the TS-723A/U. (11) Disconnect the 1066A RF output from the
(3) Increase the 1066A output to produce 100 receiver coaxial ANT input. The receiver
millivolts at the RT-505/PRC-25 coaxial should squelch, the lamp associated with
ANT input. test cable No. 1 should go out, and the
(4) Readjust the 1066A frequency for minimum TS-723A/U (used as a vacuum-tube
distortion. The new audio output level voltmeter) should indicate no receiver
on the TS-723A/U (used as a vacuum- audio output.
tube voltmeter) must be within ±3 db of (12) Reduce the 150-cps modulation to zero
the original setting (of 1 volt). and increase the 1,000-cps modulation to
d. Squelch Sensitivity and Retransmit Tests. produce l5-kc deviation. Set the RF level
(l) Perform the squelch sensitivity and re- at the RT-505/PRC-25 coaxial ANT jack
transmit test with the equipment con- to 10 microvolt. The receiver should not
nected in a standard receiver test setup unsquelch.
(para 102 and fig. 79.7) except set the RF e. Catching Range Test.
signal level at the RT-505/PRC-25 (1) Perform the catching range test with the
coaxial ANT input to 0.5 microvolt, the equipment connected in a standard receiver
RT-505/PRC-25 function switch to test setup (para 102 and fig. 79.7), except
SQUELCH, and modulate the 1066A set the 1066A and the RT-505/PRC-25
simultaneously at 1,000 cps and 150 cps as to 31.50 mc. Place the RT-505/PRC-25
described in (2) through (7) below. upside-down for this test.
(2) Set the 1066A SET MODULATION con- Caution: Check to see that the RT-
trol fully counterclockwise. 505/PRC-25 is set to a frequency ending in
(3) Use a 10-second count on the AN/USM- 50 ( XX.50 ) when disengaging the coupling
26 to adjust the output frequency of the in the procedure in (2) below; otherwise
HP-200AB to 150 Cps ±1.5 cps. the coupling may become damaged.
(4) Set the HP-200AB output level to produce (2) Disengage the mechanical coupling finger
3-kc deviation on the 1066A. Accurately (fig. 3, TM 11-5820-398-20). This dis-
determine and record the AMPLITUDE ables the crystal switching assembly from
control setting. module A10. To disengage the coupling,
(5) Set the HP-200AB AMPLITUDE con- fabricate a tool from a piece of sheet metal
trol fully counterclockwise. that measures 1 by 4 inches and is between
(6) Adjust the 1066A SET MODULATION 0.018 and 0.035 inch thick (20 to 26 gage).
control to produce 10-kc deviation. Insert one end of the sheet metal tool into
TAGO 8344-A 17
the space between module Al0 and the ceiver test setup (para 102 and fig. 79.7),
brass wheel-like part of the coupling. except disconnect test cabIe No. 9 from
(3) Adjust RT-505/PRC-25 to a frequency the 1066A output- and connect it to the
50-kc higher than its current setting. AN/USM-44 output. Monitor the RF
(4) Momentarily set the RT-505/PRC-25 voltage at A21J3 with RF Millivoltmeter
function switch to OFF, then back to Hewlett-Packard Model HP-411A (HP-
ON, and verify receiver audio output by 411A).
observing the oscilloscope and the TS- (2) Adjust the AN/USM44 for a 41.00-mc cw
723A/U (used as a vacuum-tube voltmeter) output at approximately 100 UV.
indications. (3) Tune the AN/USM-44 for a maximum
(5) Repeat the procedures given in (3) and (4) indication on the HP-411A.
above until a frequency setting produces (4) Increase the RF output of the AN/USM-
no audio output within 3 seconds, or 44 to the point where limiting just starts
until a frequency of 31.95 mc is reached. (where an increase in the AN/USM-44
Record the maximum frequency that pro- output does not increase the reading on the
duces an audio output, HP-411A.)
(6) Adjust the RT-505/PRC-25 to 31.50 mc
(5) Reduce the AN/USM-44 RF output for
and repeat the procedures given in (3) and
an indication on the HP411A that is 6
(4) above except reduce the frequency by
db below the limiting level. Sweep the
50 kc for each successive step until the
ANT/USM-44 frequency across the selec-
audio output is not obtained or until a
tivity pass band and select the frequency
frequency of 31.00 mc is reached. Record
that provides the highest peak. Readjust
the minimum frequency that produces an
the AN/USM-44 output level so the
audio output.
selected peak is 6 db below the limiting level.
(7) Withdraw the decoupling tool and rotate
the kilocycle frequency selector to 50 (6) Determine the pass-band irregularities and
to re-engage the coupling. the 6-db-down points. The pass-band
(8) Adjust the RT-505/PRC-25 to 51.50 mc irregularities should be within 2 db and
and disengage the coupling ((2) above). the 6-db-down points should be at least
(9) Repeat the procedures given in (3) and 32-kc apart. Use the AN/USM-26 to
(4) above until a frequency produces no determine the AN/USM-44 frequency at
audio output within 3 seconds or until a the 6-db points. Disconnect test cable No.
frequency of 51.95 mc is reached. Record 9 from the dummy antenna input and
the maximum frequency that produces an reconnect cable No. 9 to the AN/USM-26
audio output. input. Increase the AN/USM-44 output
(10) Adjust the RT-505/PRC-25 to 51.50 mc level sufficiently to drive the AN/USM-26.
and repeat the procedures given in (3) and (7) Set the AN/USM-44 to the frequency of
(4) above except reduce the frequency for the highest peak of the selectivity pass
each successive step until the audio output band and to an output level 6 db above the
is not . obtained or until a frequency of noise level. (Read the noise level on the
51.00 mc is reached. Record the minimum HP-411A with the AN/USM-44 output
frequency that produces an audio output. at zero; then increase the AN/USM-44
(11) Withdraw the decoupling tool and rotate RF output until a 6-db increase is indi-
the kilocycle frequency selector to 50 to cated by the HP-411A.)
reengage the coupling. (8) Increase the AN/USM-44 output level 60
(12) Evaluate the test results. At both test db and locate the two frequencies that
frequencies (31 .50 and 51.50 me), the mini- produce the same output level (6 db above
mum acceptable catching range is 650 noise) as read on the HP-411A ((7) above).
kc with at least 250 kc on each side of the Determine and record the frequencies by
test frequency. use of the AN/USM-26. The two re-
f. Selectivity Test. corded frequencies are the 60 db-down
(1) Perform the selectivity test with the points. They should be less than 100-kc
equipment connected in a standard re- apart.
18 TAGO 8344-A
(9) Repeat the procedures given in (7) and 75.40, 75.50, 75.60, 75.70, 75.80, and 75.95
(8) above except increase the RF output mc.
70 db to determine the 70-db-down (6) Repeat frequency check ((5) above) in
points. The 70-db-down points should be reverse order (75.95 mc first).
less than 120-kc apart. (7) Turn the megacycles control from 75 to 53,
(l0) Search 50 kc beyond the 70-db-down points then back to 75, and repeat the procedures
for spurious responses. Detected spurious re- given in (2), (3), and (4) above.
sponses should not be above the -70-dblevel. (8) Return the RT-505/PRC-25 to 75.00 mc,
Note. The receiver system tests are now set power supply A to 2.25 volts, power
completed. Perform the procedures indicated in supply B to 10.00 volts, and repeat the
paragraph 103 before proceeding. procedures given in (2) through (5) above.
(9) Return the RT-505/PRC-25 to 75.00 mc,
105. Transmitter System Tests, Radio Set set power supply A to 3.0 volts, power
AN/PRC-25 supply B to 15.00 volts, and repeat the
a. Power Output Test. procedures given in (2) through (5) above.
(1) Perform the power output test with the (l0) Evaluate the test results. Maximum
equipment connected in a standard trans- acceptable frequency inaccuracy is ±3.5
mitter test setup (para 103 and fig. 79.8), kc for all tests.
except set the HP-200AB output level to
zero and the RT-505/PRC-25 frequency to c. Tone Oscillator Frequency and Modulation Tests.
30.00 mc. (1) Perform the tone oscillator frequency and
(2) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER modulation tests with the equipment con-
CARRIER switch to ON. nected in a standard transmitter test setup
(3) Record the frequency and power output (para 103 and fig. 79.8) except set the
indicated by the AN/USM-26 and AN/ HP-200AB output level to zero, connect
URM-43A respectively. test cable No. 6 from the AN/USM-26
(4) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER input to the ME-57/U audio output, and
CARRIER switch to OFF. set the AN/USM-26 for a 10-second count.
(5) Repeat the procedures given in (2), (3), (2) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER
and (4) above at 42.00, 52.95, 53.00, 65.00, CARRIER switch to ON.
and 75.95 mc. (3) Record the deviation indicated by the
(6) Evaluate the test results. Minimum ME-57/U and the frequency indicated by
acceptable power output is 1.6 watts on the AN/USM-26.
the low-frequency band (30.00 to 52.95 mc) (4) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER
and 1.1 watts on the high-frequency band CARRIER switch to OFF.
(53.00 to 75.95 me). (5) Evaluate the test results. Acceptable
b. Frequency Accuracy Test. deviation is 3 kc ±0.5 kc and acceptable
(1) Perform the frequency accuracy test with frequency is 150 cps ±1.5 cps (in a 10-
the equipment connected in a standard second count).
transmitter test setup (para 103 and fig.
79.8), except set the HP-200AB output d. Modulation Capability and Deviation Tests.
level to zero., and the RT-505/PRC-25 (1) Perform the modulation capability and
frequency to 75.00 mc. deviation tests with the equipment con-
(2) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER nected in a standard transmitter test setup
CARRIER switch to ON. (para 103 and fig. 79.8), except set the
(3) Record the selected frequency (from the RT-505/PRC-25 frequency to 47.00 mc,
RT-505/PRC-25 REC-TRANS FRE- ground A23J3 with test cable No. 1, and
QUENCY indicators) and the output fre- adjust the HP-200AB output (and, as
quency as indicated by the AN/USM-26. required, the TRANSMITTER AUDIO
(4) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER INPUT LEVEL control for a 1.4-millivolt
CARRIER switch to OFF. reading on the ME-30A/U.
(5) Repeat the procedures given in (2), (3), (2) Set the test assembly Transmitter
and (4) above at 75.05, 75.10, 75.20, 73.30, CARRIER switch to ON.
TAGO 8344-A 19
(3) Record the RF and audiofrequencies microswitch in the ANT jack housing.
being used and the deviation indicated on (Use the brass adapter nut for short
the ME-57/U. antenna tests only.)
(4) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER
CARRIER switch to OFF. (4) Install the selected transmitter load be-
(5) Repeat the procedures given in (2), (3), tween the amgator clips as indicated in
and (4) above with modulation frequencies figure 79.5. Always ground the resistor
of 300, 2,000, and 3,000 cps. end of the transmitter load. The trans-
(6) Repeat the procedures given in (2), (3), mitter long antenna load characteristics
and (4) above with the RT-505/PRC-25 and minimum acceptable RF voltages
set to 60.00 mc and modulation frequencies developed across the resistor of each load
of 300, 1,000, 2,000, and 3,000 cps. are identified in the chart below.
(7) Evaluate the test results. At both 47.00
Long antenna loading
and 60.00 mc, acceptable deviation must
be within the following limits: Load characteristics
Minimum
Modulation Acceplable Test frequency (me) voltage
frequency (cps) dcuiation (kc) Resistance Capacitance (rms)
(ohms) (uuf)
300 10 +3, –4
1,000 10±2
2,000 10±3 30.00------------------ 130 0 9
3,000 10±3 52.50----------------- 619 0 21
53.50------------------ 400 8 16
e. Sidetone Test 75.00------------------ 82 70 8
(1) Perform the sidetone teat with the equip-
ment connected in a standard transmitter
setup (para 103 and fig. 79.8), except set (5) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER
the RT-505/PRC-25 VOLUME control CARRIER switch to ON and read the RF
fully clockwise and disconnect TS-723A/U voltage across the resistor of the trans-
test cable No. 4 from the ME-57/ U output mitter load with the ME-26B/U. The
and connect it to test assembly terminals minimum acceptable reading is listed in
C and D (shield) of terminal board TB1. the chart in (4) above.
(2) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER
CARRIER switch to ON. The TS-723A/ (6) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER
U (used as a vacuum-tube voltmeter) CARRIER switch to OFF.
should indicate greater than 0.7 volt. (7) Repeat the procedures given in (4), (5),
(3) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER and (6) above at 52.50, 53.50, and 75.00
CARRIER switch to OFF. mc. Use the chart in (4) above to correlate
f. Antenna Loading Tests. the required test frequency, transmitter
{1) Perform the antenna loading test with the load, and minimum acceptable voltage.
equipment connected in a standard trans- (8) Unscrew and remove antenna load adapter
mitter test setup (para 103 and fig. 79.8), No. 2.
except disconnect the AN/URM-43A input
lead at the RT-505/PRC-25 coaxial ANT (9) Install the brass adapter nut on antenna
connector, set the RT-505/PRC-25 to load adapter No. 2 and reinstall the adapter
30.00 mc, install the transmitter long in the whip ANT jack.
Note. Load adapter No. 2, with the brass nut,
antenna 30-megacycle load as described in should not energize the ANT housing microswitch.
(2) through (4) below, and connect the
ME-26B/U in parallel with the resistor of (10) Install the short antenna 30-megacycle
the transmitter load (fig. 79.5). transmitter load between the alligator
(2) Remove a mounting screw from one corner clips; make sure the resistor-end of the
of the whip ANT jack and install antenna load is grounded. Transmitter short
load adapter No. 1 (ground connection). antenna characteristics and minimum ac-
(3) Install antenna load adapter No. 2 in the ceptable RF voltages are identified in the
whip ANT jack; make sure it operates the following chart.
20 TAGO 8344-A
Short antenna loading not within ±3.5 kc of 31.50 mc or until
a frequency of 31.9.5 mc is reached.
Load characteristics
— — — — - — — — — — Minimum (7) Record the last RT-505/PRC-25 frequency
Test frequency (mc) voltage
Resistance Capacitancee (rms) setting that produced an AN/USM-26
(ohms) (uff)
—————— — — — — ————— reading within ±3.5 kc of 31.50 mc.
(8) Adjust RT-505/PRC-25 to 31.50 mc and
30.00------------------ 26.1 12 4
52.50------------------ 56.2 18
repeat the procedures given in (3) through
7
53.50------------------ 56.2 18 5 (7) above except reduce the frequency
75.00------------------ 61.9 82 7 setting for each successive step until the
output frequency exceeds ±3.5 kc of 31.50
(11) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER mc or until a frequency of 31.00 is reached.
CARRIER switch to ON and read the (9) Withdraw the decoupling tool and engage
RF voltage across the resistor of the the coupling.
transmitter load with the ME-26B/U. (l0) Adjust the RT-505/PRC-25 to 51.50 mc
The minimum acceptable reading is listed and disengage the coupling ((2 above).
in the chart in (10) above. (11) Repeat the procedures given in (3), (4),
(12) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER and (5) above until the AN/USM-26
CARRIER switch to OFF. reading produced is not within ±3.5 kc of
(13) Repeat the procedures given in (10), (11), 51.50 mc or until a frequency of 51.95 mc is
and (12) above at 52..50, 53.50, and 75.00 reached.
mc. Use the chart in (10) above to corre- (12) Record the last RT-505/PRC-25 frequency
late test frequency, transmitter load, and that produced an AN/USM-26 reading
minimum acceptable voltage. within ±3.5 kc of 51.50 mc.
(14) Remove the antenna load adapters and (13) Adjust RT-505/PRC-25 to 51.50 mc and
replace the screw in the corner of the whip repeat the procedures given in (3), (4), and
ANT jack. (5) above, except reduce the frequency for
g. Catching Range Test. each successive step, check the AN/USM-
(1) Perform the catching range test with the 26 for 51.50 mc ±3.5 kc at each step, and
equipment connected in a standard trans- stop if 51.00 mc is reached. Record the
mitter test setup (para 103 and fig. 79.8) limiting frequency.
except set the HP-200AB output level to (14) Withdraw the decoupling tool and engage
zero and the RT-505/PRC-25 frequency the coupling.
to 31.50 mc. Set the RT-505/PRC-25 (15) Evaluate the test results. At both test
upside-down for this test. frequencies (31.50 and 51.50 me), the
Caution: Check to see that the RT-505/ minimum acceptable catching range is 650
PRC-25 is set to a frequency ending in 50 kc with at least 250 kc on each side of the
( XX.50 ) when disengaging the coupling in test frequency.
procedure in (2) below; otherwise the
coupling may become damaged. h. Distortion Test.
(2) Disengage the mechanical coupling finger (1) Perform the distortion test with the equip-
(fig. 3, TM 11-5820-398-20) that disables ment connected in a standard transmitter
the crystal switching assembly from module test setup (para 103 and fig. 79.8), except
Al0 (para 104e(2)). connect test cable No. 1 from test point
(3) Adjust the RT-505/PRC-25 to a frequency A23J3 to chassis ground. The ME-57/U is
50-kc higher than its current setting. used as a receiver for this test.
(4) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER (2) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER
CARRIER switch to ON and observe the CARRIER switch to ON.
frequency indicated by the AN/USM-26. (3) Tune the ME-57/U for minimum distortion.
it should be 31.50 mc ±3.5 kc. (4) Read the distortion on the TS-723A/U.
(5) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER Maximum allowable distortion is 10 per-
CARRIER switch to OFF. cent.
(6) Repeat the procedures given in (3), (4), and (5) Set the test assembly TRANSMITTER
(5) above until the AN/USM-26 reading is CARRIER switch to OFF.
TAGO 8344-A 21
106. Miscellaneous System Tests and In- b. Inspection.
spection, Radio Set AN/PRC-25 (1) Perform the inspection procedure as a
final step before replacing the RT-505/
a. Tests. PRC-25 case.
(1) Perform the miscellaneous system tests (2) Inspect the RT-505/PRC-25 PRESET
with the equipment connected in a standard knobs. Operate the elements of the presetting
transmitter test setup (para 103 and fig. feature to assure moper operation.
79.8) . (3) Inspect the gasket at the rear of the front
(2) Connect Handset H-138/U to one of the panel of RT-505/PRC-25. It should be
AUDIO connectors on the front panel of resilient, properly seated in its channel, and
RT-505/PRC-25. in general good condition.
(4) Inspect the O-ring on J4. It should be
(3) Press the H-138/U keying button and resilient, properly seated in its channel, and in
speak into the microphone. The AN/ general good condition. When replacing
URM-43A; ME-57/U, and AN/USM-50A the RT-505/PRC-25 case, be sure the O-
should indicate transmitter output, and ring is not damaged and that the case is
sidetone should be heard from the earphone. properly seated against the gasket on the
(4) Connect the H-138/U to the other AUDIO rear of the front panel. If either gasket is
connector and repeat the procedure given in poor” condition or not properly seated,
in (3) above. the unit will not be waterproof.
(5) Replace the RT-505/PRC-25 in its case.
(5) Set the RT-505/PRC-25 function selector Inspect the four captive screws before
to LITE and observe that the REC- engaging them. Engage and tighten the
TRANS FREQUENCY dials are lighted. captive screws.
(6) With the ME-26B/U, measure the terminal Page 167, figure 88. Make the following changes:
voltages of battery connector J4. Voltage Near switches S2 and S3 add: (Note 5).
measurements between terminals and After note 4, add note 5:
ground should be 0 volt at terminal A, 12.5 5. ON EQUIPMENT BEARING ORDER
volts at terminal B, and 2.5 volts at No. 64009-PP-63, SWITCHES S2 and S3
terminal C. ARE OMITTED.
22 TAGO 8344A
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
HAROLD K. JOHNSON,
General, United States Army,
official: Chief of Staff.
J. C. LAMBERT,
Major General, United States Amy,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
Active Army:
USASA (2) USA Rsch Spt Gp (Ft Belvoir) (5) USASCC (4)
CNGB (1) 507th USASA Gp (5) USA Tml Comd (1)
CC-E (7) 508th USASA Gp (5) Army Tml (1 ) except
Dir of Trans (l) 318th USASA Bn (5) OART (5)
CofEngrs (1) 319th USASA Bn (5) USATC AD (2)
TSG (1) 320th USASA Bn (5) USATC Armor (2)
CofSptS (1) 177th USASA Co (5) USATC Engr (2)
USAIB (5) 182nd USASA Co (5) USATC Inf (2)
USCONARC (5) 183rd USASA Co (5) USASTC (2)
USAMC (5) 184th USASA Co (5) WRAMC (1)
ARADCOM (5) Instl (2) except Army Pic Cen (2)
ARADCOM Rgn (2) Ft Monmouth (70) USAATC (5)
OS MAj Cored (4) Ft Gordon ( 10) WSMR (5)
LOGCOMD (2) Ft Huachuca ( 10) Sig Fld Maint Shopa (2)
USAECOM (30) Ft Carson (21) AMS (1)
USAMICOM (4) USMA (5) USAERDAA (2)
USASMC (2) Svc Colleges (2) USAERDAW ( 13)
USACDCEA (1) Br Svc Sch (2) except Units org under fol TOE’e (2 copies
USACDCCBRA (1) MFSS (5) each except as indicated):
USACDCCEA (1) USAARMS (5) 11-16
USACDCCEA (Ft Huachuca Ofc) USASCS (5) 11-35
(1) USA Cmbt Survl Sch (5) 11-57
USACDCOA (1) USASESCS (50) 11-97
USACDCQMA (1) GENDEP (2) 11-98
USACDCTA (1) Sig See, GENDEP (5) 11-117
USACDCADA (1) Sig Dep (12) 11-155
USACDCARMA (1) Army Dep (2) except SAAD (30) 11-157
USACDCAVNA (1) TOAD (14) 11-337
USACDCARTYA (1) FTWOAD ( 10) 11-5’)0 (AA-AE) (4)
USACDCSWA (1) LEAD (5) 11-555
MDW (1) SHAD (3) 11-557
Armies (2) except NAAD, SVAD (5) 11-558
Seventh USA (5) CHAD (3) 11-587
Corps (2) ATAD (10) 11-592
USAC (3) Lexington-Blue Gram (14) 11-597
llth Air Aslt Div (3) USAMERCC (5) 29-25 (12)
lst GM Bde (5)
NG: State AG (3).
USAR: None.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 320-50.
TAGO 8344-A 23
TM 11-5820-398-35
Technical Manual HEADQUARTERS,
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 11-5820-398-35 WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 8 January 1963
RADIO SET AN/PRC-25
Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,2 3

CHAPTER 2. THEORY
Section I. Block diagram analysis.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 4,5
II. Circuit analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 7-40
CHAPTER 3. THIRD ECHELON MAINTENANCE
Section I. General troubleshooting techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-36 42
II. Third echelon troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-39 44-52
III. Third echelon repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-42 53,54
IV. Third echelon alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-45 59,60
CHAPTER 4. FOURTH ECHELON MAINTENANCE
Section I. Fourth echelon repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-48 61-64
II. Fourth echelon alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-51 66,67
III. Fourth echelon testing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-67 67-105
C HAPTER 5. FIFTH ECHELON MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-97 106-147
A PPENDIX REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... . . . . 169
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
1
This page left blank intentionally.
2
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
1. Scope
Form 2496 (Disposition Form), or letter
a. This manual covers field and depot may be used.)
maintenance for Radio Set AN/PRC-25. It
includes instructions appropriate to third, 2. Index of Publications
fourth, and fifth echelons for troubleshoot-
ing, testing, aligning, and repairing the Refer to the latest issue of DA Pam 310-4
equipment. Detailed functions of the equip- to determine whether there are new edi-
ment are covered in the theory chapter. tions, Changes, or additional publications
b. The complete set of technical manuals pertaining to your equipment. Department
for this equipment includes TM 11-5820- of the Army Pamphlet No. 310-4 is a cur-
398-10, TM 11-5820-398-20, TM 11-5820- rent index of Technical Manuals, Technical
398-20P, and TM 11-5820-398-35P. Bulletins, Supply Bulletins, Lubrication
c. Forward all comments on this publi- Orders, and Modification Work Orders
cation direct to: Commanding Officer, that are available through publications
U. S. Army Electronics Materiel Support supply channels. The index lists the indi-
Agency, ATTN: SELMS-MP, Fort Mon- vidual parts (-10, -20, -35P, etc) and the
mouth, New Jersey. (DA Form 1598 (Rec- latest Changes to and revisions of each
ord of Comments on Publications), DA equipment publication.
3
CHAPTER 2
THEORY
Section I. BLOCK DIAGRAM ANALYSIS
3. Receiving Signal Path mixer stage is coupled through the 11.5-

(fig. 82) mc crystal filter, and amplified by the
Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/ receiver first, second, third, fourth and
fifth if. amplifiers. The receiver fifth if.
PRC-25 is tunable in 50-kilocycle (kc)
amplifier output is applied to the receiver
increments over a frequency range of
30.00 to 75.95 megacycles (me) to provide discriminator driver. The receiver dis-
920 channels. The frequency range is criminator driver output is applied to the
covered in two bands: the low band is receiver discriminator. The five receiver
30.00 to 52.95 mc; the high band is 53.00 if. stages (A21) have a power gain of ap-
to 75.95 mc. The front panel tuning con- proximately 85 decibels (db). The driver
trols and the BAND switch are used for output is fully limited. The limited if. sig-
tuning the RT-505/PRC-25 to the desired nal is applied to the receiver discrimi-
frequency. nator, which demodulates the if. signal.
a. The incoming radiofrequency (rf) sig- The audio output of the receiver discrimi-
nals are coupled from the antenna through nator is applied to the receiver first audio
the antenna loading network to the power amplifier.
amplifier tank. The antenna loading net- d. The receiver first audio amplifier
work matches the antenna circuit imped- output is applied to both the VOLUME
ance to the long or the short antenna. control and to the squelch input ampli-
The power amplifier tank couples the rf fier. The VOLUME control controls the
signal to the receiver first rf amplifier. audio signal level to the receiver audio
The power amplifier tank tunes both the output amplifier. The amplified signal
receiver and transmitter signals. Relay from the receiver audio output amplifier
K1 protects the receiver first rf amplifier is fed to the handset. The two receiver
from the high power during transmission audio amplifiers also amplify sidetone
by grounding the input to the receiver signals from the speech amplifier limiter
first rf amplifier. The amplified signal of the transmitter section during trans-
from the receiver first rf amplifier is mission.
applied to the receiver second rf amplifier, e. During squelch operation, when no
where it is amplified and applied to the signal is being received, the audio out-
receiver mixer. put circuit is shorted to ground through
b. The output from the variable freq- contacts of squelch relay K3. If an rf
uency oscillator (vfo), ranging in frequency carrier having a s qu e 1 c h tone is re-
from 41.50 to 64.45 mc in 50-kc incre- ceived, K3 is energized by an output from
ments, is applied through the vfo buffer the relay driver, the short circuit is re-
to the receiver mixer. The receiver mixer moved, and audio signals are fed to the H-
heterodynes the two signals to produce the 138/U handset. Relay K3 will be energized
11.5-mc intermediate frequency (if.). The only if the output from the receiver first
vfo frequency is stabilized by the output audio amplifier includes a 150 cycle-per-
of the frequency synthesizer system (para second (cps) tone signal. During trans-
5). The ganged tuning capacitor is posi- mission, the transmitter tone generator
tioned by the mc and kc tuning controls provides a 150-cps signal to the squelch
through a gear train. input amplifier to prevent shorting the
c. The 11.5-mc if. output of the receiver sidetone.
4
f. The receiver audio amplifier output, bility of the sso approximately 40 times
including the 150-cps tone, is applied to relative to its free-running state.
the squelch input amplifier. The squelch c. The frequency-modulated (fm) output
input amplifier with the emitter -follower of the sso is coupled through the sso
and squelch feedback amplifier passes buffer amplifier to the transmitter mixer.
the 150-cps tone, which is rectified in the The sso buffer prevents loading of the sso
squelch direct current (dc) detector am- by the transmitter mixer. The transmitter
plifier. When the squelch relay driver mixer heterodynes the 11.5-mc fm signal
receives a signal from the dc detector from the sso with the vfo signal to produce
amplifier, it provides the current neces- the transmitter output frequency. The vfo
sary to energize K3. When K3 is energized, is stabilized by application of its output
the ground is removed from the audio frequency through the frequency synthe-
output amplifier to allow the audio sig- sizer buffer to the frequent y synthesizer
nal to be fed to the handset. system (fss) (para 5). The fss will correct
g. In addition to the function of squelch any vfo frequency drift.
relay K3 described in f above, relay K3 d. The transmitter mixer output is ap-
provides a transmitter keying function plied to the transmitter first rf amplifier.
when two AN/PRC-25's are used for re- The output of the transmitter first rf
transmission. During this type of service, amplifier is applied to the transmitter
the receiving AN/PRC-25 is set for second rf amplifier, which is cascaded with
squelch operation. When a signal is re- the intermediate power amplifier and the
ceived, energizing K3, a ground circuit power amplifier. These amplifiers in-
is completed, through the interconnecting crease the transmitted signal level to
cable, to key the transmitting AN/PRC- the proper amplitude. The transmitter
25. power amplifier output is coupled through
the power amplifier tank and antenna
loading network to the antenna. During
4. Transmitting Signal Path transmission, the input to the receiver
(fig. 83) is grounded by relay K1 which is energized
a. The audio signal developed in the by receive-transmit relay K2. Relay K2
handset microphone is amplified in the also energizes the dc-to-dc converter,
first and second speech amplifiers, and which supplies the operating voltages
limited in the output limiter stage. The (B+ and bias) for the power amplifier
output limiter stage has two outputs: it tube.
applies the audio signals to the receiver
first audio amplifier as sidetone, and
5. Frequency Synthesizer System
applies the audio signal to the modulator.
(fig. 84)
The modulator also has a 150-cps tone
input from the 150-cycle tone oscillator, The frequency synthesizer system (fss)
through the feedback amplifier. The mod- is a closed loop, automatic phase control
ulating voltages applied to the modulator (apc) system which locks the vfo on fre-
cause the sidestep oscillator (SSO ) output quency. The fss is used both during recep-
frequency to vary at the input audio- tion and during transmission. During
frequency (af) rate from the microphone transmission, the vfo output frequency is
and at the 150 -cps rate. The output from shifted 50 kc lower than it is during recep-
the 150-cps tone generator is also applied tion. The frequencies shown on figure 84
to the squelch input amplifier (para 3f). represent the fss frequencies associated
b The frequency stability of the sso is with two typical received frequencies,
greatly improved by the quarter-wave net- and are used to illustrate the frequency
work. The quarter-wave network is a relationships. The two typical received
crystal-controlled passive network con- frequencies are 33.10 mc (low band) and
nected across the sso tuned circuit. The 68.45 mc (high band). All frequencies used
quarter-wave network improves the sta- in a through i below can be converted to
5
those used for transmission, unless other- quency and the vfo frequency (44.60 mc)
wise indicated, by subtraction of 50 kc equals 52.60 mc.
from the given frequency. d. The 53-mc filter passes a band of’
a. The vfo output frequency ranges from frequencies, centered at 53 mc, to the fss
41.50 mc to 64.45 mc. The specific fre- second mixer. The fss second mixer is
quency depends on the channel selected, also supplied an input signal from the
and whether the channel is in the high or 100-kc interval oscillator (e below)
low band. through the tuned net work, which re-
(1) When the low band is used, the vfo duces spurious frequencies. The fss sec-
operates at 11.50 mc above the ond mixer heterodynes the two signals to
carrier frequency. For example, at produce their difference, which is the fss.
a received frequency of 33.10 mc, if. It is applied to the fss if. am-
the vfo frequency is 44.60 mc. plifier.
(2) When the high band is used, the e. The output frequency of the 100-kc
vfo operates at 11.50 mc below interval oscillator, which is independent
the carrier frequency. For ex- of the receive-transmit condition, ranges
ample, at a received carrier fre- from 46.85 mc to 47.75 mc in 100-kc
quency of 68.45 mc, the vfo fre- increments. The specific frequency de-
quency is 56.95 mc. pends on the frequency selected by the kc
b. The vfo output (a above) is applied tuning knob; that is, whichever 50- or
through the fss buffer and the fss first 100-kc channel point is selected. Except
mixer buffer to the fss first mixer. The for the 0.95-mc channel point, the fre-
two buffer stages isolate the vfo from the quency relationship is such that the out-
fss first mixer to prevent feedback of put of the 100-kc interval oscillator is
sidebands created in the mixer. The fss 46.85 mc above a specific 100-kc channel
first mixer receives another ‘input from point (0.00 mc, 0.10 mc, 0.20 mc, etc) and
the pulse generator, ‘which is driven by 46.90 mc above a specific 50-kc channel
the output of the 1.0-mc crystal oscillator. point (0.05 mc, 0.15 mc, 0.25 mc, etc).
(During transmission, the output of the At the 0.95-mc channel point, the 100-kc
1-mc crystal oscillator, and, therefore, interval oscillator is 45.90 mc above the
that of the pulse generator, do not change kc indication; therefore, with the kc tuning
in frequency.) The sinusoidal output of the knob set at the 0.95- or 0.00-mc channel
l-mc crystal oscillator is applied to the point, the 100-kc interval oscillator fre-
pulse generator where it is shaped into quency will be 46.85 mc; at a 0.05- or
pulses that are rich in harmonic content. 0.10-mc channel point, the frequency will
The output of the pulse generator, which be 46.95 mc; at a 0.15- or 0.20-mc chan-
is applied to the fss first mixer, is a nel point, the frequency will be 47.05 mc;
frequency spectrum ran gin g from 1 at a 0.85- or 0.90-mc channel point, the
through 12 mc in l-mc increments. (During frequency will be 47.75 mc.
transmission, the frequency spectrum (1) The fss if. will always be 5.65 mc
does not change.) The fss first mixer at the 100-mc channel points dur-
heterodynes the two inputs and applies the ing reception, and 5.60 mc during
resultant spectrum to the 53-mc filter. transmission.
c. Since the frequencies developed in (2) The fss if. will always be 5.60 mc
the fss first mixer output will be the two at the 50-kc channel points during
original signals plus their sum and dif- reception and 5.55 mc during
ference, a frequency (plus its upper and transmission.
lower sidebands) which approaches the 53- f. The fss if. amplifier has a power
mc bandpass will always be generated, gain of approximately 40 db to provide
regardless of the vfo output frequency. adequate limiting for a constant output
For example, when the vfo is operating amplitude. The fss if. amplifier output is
at 44.60 mc, the sum of the eighth harmonic applied to the discriminator and to the
(8 mc) of the pulse generator output fre- phase comparator. The phase comparator
6
also has an input from the 50-kc interval from the oscillator buffer and fss if.) is
oscillator. compared and a control voltage is devel-
g. The- 50-kc interval oscillator gen- oped in the phase comparator. The control
erates one of three frequencies: 5.55 mc, voltage is applied through the antihunt
5.60 mc, or 5.65 mc. The specific fre- network to the apc modulator. If a phase
quency depends on the frequency selected lock exists, the apc voltage will assume
by the kc tunin g knob (50- or 100-kc in- the reference level to maintain the vfo on
crements) and whether the RT-505/PRC- frequency. If a phase difference exists,
25 is receiving or transmitting. When a an error voltage is developed in the phase
50-kc channel point (37 .45, 71.25, etc) is comparator. This error voltage varies
selected, the 50-kc interval oscillator out- the apc voltage applied to the apc modu-
put frequency will be 5.60 mc during recep- lator from the reference level to correct
tion. (During reception, relay K2 causes a the operating frequency of the vfo.
frequency shift to 5.55 me.) When a 100-kc i. If the vfo output is too far from its
channel point (37.40, 71.20, etc) is se- proper frequency to be corrected by the
lected, the 50-kc interval oscillator output phase comparator output, the discrimina-
frequency will be 5.65 mc, during recep- tor (which extends the capture range of the
tion. During transmission, relay K2 causes fss) will develop a hunt voltage, which in-
a 50-kc shift to 5.60 mc. creases the deviation of the apc voltage.
(1) During reception, the 50-kc inter- Since the vfo is far from its correct fre-
val oscillator output will always be quency, the frequency of the signal applied
5.65 mc at the 100-kc channel to the discriminator (f above) will be con-
point; during transmission, it will siderably removed from the proper fss if.
be 5.60 mc. (e above). The discriminator will develop
(2) During reception, the 50-kc inter- a large error (hunt) voltage. This hunt
val oscillator output will always voltage which is applied through the anti-
be 5.60 mc at the 50-kc channel hunt network to the apc modulator, changes
points; during transmission, it will the vfo output frequency to within the pull-
be 5.55 mc. in and hold-in capabilities of the phase
h. The output of the 50-kc interval os - comparator. The antihunt network stops
cillator (g above) is applied as a reference the hunting action of the vfo when the phase
signal to the phase comparator. The phase comparator has control of the vfo fre-
of the two input signals (reference signal quency.
Section II. CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
6. First Rf Amplifier Module A3 the power amplifier tank circuit. The out-
(fig. 1) put of Q1 is taken from the collector
through coupling capacitor C5 and resistor
First rf amplifier module A3 amplifies R4 to BAND switch S1. Resistor R4 sup-
the signal received from module A2 (para presses parasitic oscillations.
20). The first rf amplifier consists of a b. Switch S1 is positioned by the BAND
sing1e transistor amplifier, the BAND switch on the front panel. The collector
switch, and tuned output circuits. circuit of Q1 is tuned in each of the two
a. The input signal from module A2 is BAND positions as follows:
coupled through transformer T1 and coup- (1) Low band. Transformer T2, fixed
ling capacitor C 3 to the base and emitter capacitor C8, trimmer capacitor
of transistor Q1. The center-tap of the C7 and tuning capacitor C2C (fig.
secondary of T1 is returned to rf ground 1) make up the tuned circuit. The
through capacitor C2. The use of the tapped position of tuning capacitor C2C is
transformer input coupling neutralizes the determined by the mc and kc con-
stage and isolates the rf amplifier from trols on the front panel.
7
(2) High band. Transformer T3, fixed The vfo input signal from module A9 is
capacitor C11, trimmer capacitor coupled to the base of vfo buffer Q2 through
C9, and tuning capacitor C2C make isolating resistor RI and coupling capaci-
up the tuned circuit. Switch S1-D tor C1. Resistor R4 matches the impedance
shorts the low-band tuned circuit of the input circuit. The vfo buffer output
to prevent loss of energy when op- is coupled to the emitter circuit of transis-
erating on the high band. tor Q1 through coupling transformer T1.
c. The combinatoin of resistors R3 and The buffer base bias is determined by a
R2 establishes the fixed bias for transis - voltage divider composed of R5 and R6.
tor Q1. Resistor R1 is the emitter swamp- b. The potential on the base of transistor
ing resistor. Capacitor C6 and resistor Q1 is varying at the rf signal frequency
R4 form a parasitic suppressor. Inductor and the emitter potential is varying at the
L2 is an rf decoupling coil. Capacitors Cl vfo frequency; the collector output circuit
and C4 and inductor L1 make up a pi-type if tuned to the difference between the two
rf filter which prevents rf leakage into the input frequencies; 11.5 mc. The collector
power supply. Capacitor C10 is connected circuit consists of the primary of trans -
in series with tuning capacitor C2C (fig. former T2 and capacitor C6.
88) on the high band by SIC to decrease c. The combination of capacitor C3 and
the effect of tuning capacitor C2C. Test resistor R9 neutralizes Q1. Capacitors
jack J2 can be used for measuring the in- C4, C5, and C7 are rf bypass capacitors.
put signal to module A3. Inductor L3 (in The combination of capacitor C8 and in-
the main frame (fig. 88)) is an rf filter ductor L1 decouples the module circuit
choke in series with the +10-volt regulated from the 10-volt dc supply. Resistors R5
input to module A3. and R6 develop base bias for transistor
Q2. Resistor R7 is the emitter swamping
7. Second Rf Amplifier Module A4 resistor. Resistor R3 provides damping
(fig. 2) for the primary of coupling transformer
T1.
The second rf amplifier module A4 am-
plifies the signal from first amplifier mod-
9. Receiver If. Amplifier Module A21
ule A3 (para 6). The A4 output is applied
(fig. 85)
to receiver mixer module A5 (para 8). The
second rf amplifier consists of a single The if. amplifiers provide amplification
transistor amplifier, a BAND switch, and of the 11.5-mc if. signal from 11.5-mc
tuned output circuits. The circuit configur- filter module A27. The if. amplifier module
ation and operation of module A4 is similar consists of five stages of amplification, and
to that of first rf amplifier module A3 (para a discriminator driver output.
6) except that tuning capacitor C2D is used. a. If. Amplifiers 01, 02, and 03.
(1) The input from the 11.5-mc filter
8. Receiver Mixer Module AS
module is coupled through inductor
(fig. 3)
Ll, developed across resistor R2,
Receiver mixer module A5 heterodynes and coupled to the base of receiver
the rf signal from second rf amplifier first if. amplifier Q1 through ca-
module A4 (para 7) with the vfo output to pacitor C1. The signal output from
produce an if. of 11.5 mc. Module A5 con- Q1 is coupled through capacitor C4
sists of a receiver mixer stage, a vfo buf- and developed across base resistor
fer stage, a coupling transformer, and a R7 of Q2. Amplifier Q2 develops its
tuned output circuit. The dc operating volt- output signal across resistor R10.
age is available to this module during re- This output signal is coupled
ception only. through capacitor C7 and is devel-
a. The rf signal input is coupled to the oped across base resistor R11 of
base of receiver mixer Q1 through isolat- third if. amplifier Q3. The collec-
ing resistor R2 and coupling capacitor C2. tor output of Q3 is developed across
8
Figure 1.
9
Figure 2.
10
the tuned circuit consisting of ca- b. Receiver Fourth and Fifth If. Ampli-
pacitor C9 and the primary winding fiers Q4 and Q5. Transistors Q4 and Q5,
of transformer T1. amplify the if. signal, and also limit strong
(2) The combination of resistors R2 signals.
and R3, R7 and R8, and R11 and R12 (1) The out put of Q4 is developed
develops base-to-emitter bias for across collector load resistor R17
Q1, Q2, and Q3 respectively. Re- and is coupled through capacitor
sistors R4, R9, and R13 are emit- C12 to the base of fifth if. amplifier
ter swamping resistors. Capaci- Q5. The collector output of ampli-
tors C3, C6, and C8 are emitter fier Q5 is developed across load
rf bypass capacitors for Ql, Q2, resistor R21 and applied through
and Q3 respectively. Resistors R5 coupling capacitor C 15 to the base
and R10 are collector load resis- of receiver discriminator driver
tors for amplifiers Q1 and Q2, re- Q6.
spectively. Resistor R6 and capac- (2) Resistors R14 and R15, and R18,
itor C2 form a decoupling network and R19 develop base-to-emitter
between the +10-volt circuit of the bias for Q4 and Q5 respectively.
first if. amplifier and the other Resistors R16 and R20 are emitter
stages. The input signal to module swamping resistors and capacitors
A21 can be measured at test jack C11 and C14 are the emitter bypass
J3. capacitors for Q4 and Q5 respec-
Figure 3. Receiver mixer module A5, schematic diagram.
11
tively. Resistors R17 and R21 are is also applied to tone squelch module A24
collector load resistors for Q4 and (para 11). The collector signal of amplifier
Q5, respectively. Q1 is fed back through coupling capacitor
c. Receiver Discriminator Driver Q6. C3 and voltage dropping resistor R1 to the
The receiver discriminator driver ampli- base of Q1 to supply a small amount of de-
fies and limits the 11.5-mc if. signal output generative feedback to minimize audio dis-
from Q5 and applies a strong signal of con- tortion, and to prevent discriminator load-
stant amplitude to discriminator Z1 (fig. ing by presenting a relatively high input
88). impedance to Z1.
(1) The 11.5-mc signal from Q5 is b. The audio signal at the moving contact
coupled through capacitor C15 to of the VOLUME control is applied through
the base of Q6. The output of the coupling capacitor C5 and isolation resis -
driver is developed across a tuned tor R5 to the base of receiver audio output
circuit consisting of capacitor C18 amplifier Q2. The output signal at the col-
and the primary of coupling trans - lector of amplifier Q2 is applied to the
former T2. The secondary of trans- primary of audio transformer T1. The au-
former T2 and the tuned circuit dio signal is applied from the secondary
consisting of capacitor C21 and of T1 to the handset through the contacts
variable inductor L4 match the out- of squelch relay K3 (fig. 88).
put impedance of driver Q6 to the c. Capacitor C2 is an rf bypass in the
input impedance of discriminator input circuit. The combination of resistors
Z1. Resistor R25 and capacitor C19 R2 and R3 provides fixed base-to-emitter
form a compensating network which bias for Q1. The combination of resistors
improves the response and linear- R7 and R8 provides fixed base-to-emitter
ity of the input signal to Z1. bias for Q2. Resistor R10 is the collector
(2) Resistors R22 and R23 develop the voltage dropping resistor. Capacitor C7 is
base-to-emitter bias for driver a bypass capacitor for noise. Resistor R9
Q6. Resistor R24 is the emitter is the emitter swamping resistor; capac-
swamping resistor and capacitor itor C6 is the emitter bypass capacitor.
C16 is the emitter bypass. Resis- Resistor R11 presents a constant output
tor R26 is a filter resistor in the impedance to Q2 when function switch S1
+10-volt supply line. The combina- (fig. 88) is in the SQUELCH position and
tion of capacitors C17, C13, and there is no incoming signal. The input sig-
inductor L3 prevent rf leakage into nal to module A25 can be measured at test
the supply. The output is coupled jack J3. Resistor R12 isolates the input
through capacitor C20 to Z1. The circuit of transistor Q1 from external
output from T2 can be measured loads introduced at test jack J3. The output
at test point J4. signal from module A25 can be measured
at test jack J4.
d. During transmission, the sidetone au-
10. Receiver Audio Amplifier Module A25 dio from module A22 is coupled through
(fig. 4)
capacitor C8 to the input circuit of Q1.
Receiver audio amplifier module A25 e. Capacitor C11 (in the mainframe (fig.
amplifies the audio output from the 11.5- 88)) is an rf bypass capacitor on the +10-
mc discriminator, Z1, and applies it to the volt regulated input to module A25.
handset.
a. The audio output from Z1 is coupled 11. Tone Squelch Module A24
through coupling capacitor Cl to the base (fig. 5)
of receiver first audio amplifier Q1. The
output signal from Q1 is developed across a. When the function switch on the front
collector load resistor R4 and is coupled panel is at SQUELCH, +10 volts dc is ap-
through capacitor C4 to VOLUME control plied to the tone squelch module. Squelch
R1 on the front panel (fig. 88). This signal input amplifier Q1 and squelch emitter fol-
12
Figure 4. Receiver audio amplifier module A25, schematic diagram.
lower Q2 have a common emitter resistor, emitter of Q1. If the received audio signal
R6. Transistor Q2 operates near satura- is modulated by a 150-cps tone, minimum
tion. Audio input signals from the audio degenerative signal is applied to the base
amplifier module are applied through iso- of Q2. This action reduces the gain of Q1
lation resistor R2, attenuated by dropping at all frequencies except 150-cps. The bias
resistor R3, and are applied, through coup- applied to the base of Q2 is determined
ling capacitor C2 to input amplifier Q1. only by the voltage divider consisting of
The audio output signals from Q1 are de- resistors R9 and R13; transistor Q2 will
veloped across collector load resistor R7 conduct and effectively cut off Q1 by virtue
and directly coupled to the base of squelch of common emitter coupling across R6.
feedback amplifier Q3. The audio signals As a result, the bias applied to the base of
amplified by transistor Q3 are developed Q3 through the voltage divider, consisting
across a frequency selective (twin T) net- of resistors R8 and R7 and thermistor RT1,
work which acts as the collector load. Re- is sufficient to cut off this stage.
sistors R10 and R11 and capacitor C 5 form b. When the 150-cps tone is present with
one T; capacitors C 3 and C4, and resistor the incoming signal, the collector output of
R12 form the other. This network is com- feedback amplifier Q3, a 150-cps tone sig-
parable to an antiresonant circuit; it ap- nal only, is filtered by the combination of
plies minimum signal voltage to the base resistor R16 and capacitor C8 and is ap-
of transistor Q2 at the frequency of 150 plied through coupling capacitor C7 to the
cps, and maximum signal voltage at other base of amplifier-detector Q4. With no sig-
frequencies. The signal applied to the base nal input, the base of transistor Q4 is at
of Q2 is degenerative to the signal at the ground potential. Only the positive half
13
cycles of the 150-cps signal will cause frame) (fig. 88) at SQUELCH, sidetone au-
the amplifier-detector to conduct. The out- dio is applied to the squelch circuit input,
put developed across collector load resis- while the 150-cps tone is coupled across
tor R18 is a negative-going half-wave isolation resistor R1 and superimposed
rectified s i g n a 1. The output signal is on the sidetone audio signal. This condition
filtered by capacitor C9 and is directly permits the operator to hear the sidetone
coupled to the base of relay driver Q5. The in his handset.
negative dc signal causes transistor Q5 to
conduct, which causes current to flow
12. Speech Amplifier Limiter Module A22
through the squelch relay winding. When
(fig. 6)
relay K3 energizes, the receiver circuits
will operate. The speech amplifier limiter amplifies
c. Capacitor Cl is a bypass for the the audiofrequency signals from the mi-
higher audiofrequencies. The combination crophone section of the handset. This mod-
of resistor R14 and capacitor C6 decouples ule consists of two speech amplifiers and
the emitter circuit of transistor Q3 from an output limiter stage. The audio output
the +10-volt supply. Potentiometer R15, is applied to sidestep oscillator module
which is the emitter swamping resistor A20 (para 14) and sidetone output is sup-
for transistor Q3, is used to adjust the plied to receiver audio amplifier module
negative feedback to the base of transistor A25 (para 10).
Q1 through dropping resistor R5 to thereby a. Audio signals are coupled through an
control amplifier gain. Potentiometer R15 input matching pad consisting of resistor
is normally adjusted so that an audio in- Rl, inductor L1, and capacitor Cl through
put signal of 35 millivolts minimum causes coupling capacitor C2 to the base of first
squelch relay K3 to become energized. The speech amplifier Q1. The amplified audio
combination of the squelch relay coil and output from the collector of Q1 is applied
resistor R19 provides emitter operating through coupling capacitor C5 to the base
voltage for relay driver Q5. During trans- of second speech amplifier Q2. The audio
mission, with function switch S1 (main- signal output from Q2 is applied through
Figure 5. Tone squelch module A 2 4 , s c h e m a t i c d i a g r a m .
14
coupling capacitor C7 to the base of output inversely with temperature; therefore, the
limiter Q3. The output limiter signal is bias remains constant despite wide vari-
developed across collector load resistors ations in temperature. Resistor R10 is the
R17 and R18. The audio output to A20 (para emitter swamping resistor for Q2. The
14) of the sso is coupled through capacitor combination of resistor R9 and capacitor
C10 while the sidetone output to receiver C6 decouples the Q2 emitter circuit from
audio module A25 is directly coupled from any extraneous noise signals. Resistor
the junction of resistors R17 and R18. A R11 is the collector load for second speech
150-cps tone signal from the tone genera- amplifier Q2.
tor module is superimposed on the audio c. Resistive divider R13 and R14 pro-
output signal to the sso through isolation vides base-to-emitter bias for output lim-
resistor R19. iter Q3. Resistor R16 is the emitter
b. Resistors R2 and R3 establish base- swamping resistor’ for Q3. The combina-
to-emitter fixed bias for transistor Q1. tion of resistor R15 and capacitor C8 de-
Resistor R5 is an emitter swamping re- couples the e m i t t e r circuit from any
sistor for Q1. The combination of resistor extraneous noise signals. The combination
R4 and capacitor C4 decouples the emitter of inductor L2 and capacitor C9 decouples
circuit from the +10-volt supply. Resistor the emitter from the +10-volt supply. Re-
R6 is the collector load for first speech sistor R12 is a power supply voltage drop-
amplifier Q1. Resistor 11 is the collector ping resistor. Capacitor C22 filters the
load resistor for second speech amplifier power supply voltage for transistors Q1
Q2. The combination of resistors R7, and and Q2. The audio output to module A20
R8 and diode CR1 establishes base-to- can be measured at test jack J3. Capacitor
emitter bias for speech amplifier Q2. Be- C10 (in the main frame (fig. 88)) is an rf
cause of the negative temperature coeffi- bypass capacitor on the +10-volt regulated
cient of diode CR1, the bias varies input to modules A22 and A23.
Figure 6. Speech amplifier limiter module A22, schematic diagram.
15
13. Tone Generator Module A23 sure maximum output with minimum dis-
(fig. 7) tortion. A portion of the tone oscillator
output signal, from the junction of collector
The tone oscillator functions only during
resistor R11 and potentiometer R12, is fed
transmission. The 150-cps output tone is
applied to the speech amplifier limiter back through resistor R5 to the base of
transistor Q1 to stabilize the oscillator
module (para 12) which frequency-modu-
gain and prevent distortion due to exces-
lates the transmitter output carrier signal
sive base drive. The 150-cycle tone output
with the tone at all times during transmis-
is applied to speech amplifier A22 (para
sion. The 150-cps tone disables the squelch
12) in the transmitter section and to tone
circuit in the distant receiver.
squelch amplifier A24 (para 11) in the re-
a. During transmission, +10-volt dc op-
ceiver section.
erating voltage is applied to transistor Q1
c. The combination of resistors R6, R7,
which oscillates at 150-cps. The frequency
R5, and RT2 and potentiometer R12 pro-
is determined by the resistance-capaci-
vides base-to-emitter fixed bias for oscil-
tance (rc) phase-shifting network consist-
lator Q1. Resistor R8 is the emitter
ing of capacitors Cl, C2, and C3 and re-
swamping resistor for oscillator Q1; R9
sistors R1, R2, and R4. Slight adjustment is the swamping resistor for Q2. Resistor
of the frequency can be made by adjust-
R9 is the emitter swamping resistor for
ment of FREQ ADJ potentiometer R3. Os-
Q2. Potentiometer R12 is the output level
cillation is sustained by a feeding back of adjustment for the 150-cps tone output.
the collector output through phase-shifting
The 150-cps tone output from R12 can be
capacitors C1, C2, and C3, to the base of
measured at test jack J3.
Q1. Each capacitor shifts the signal 60° to
provide the regenerative 180° phase shift,
Temperature compensation is achieved by 14. Sidestep Oscillator Module A20 ond
thermistor RT2, which provides a temper- Quarter-Wave Network Module A19
ature compensated bias on the base of Q1, The sidestep oscillator (fig. 8) is a mod-
and thermistor RT1, which compensates ified Hartley type. A quarter-wave network
the phase-shift network. (fig. 9) is connected to the oscillator tuned
b. The feedback amplifier is used to in- circuit to stabilize the frequency. The
Figure 7. Tone generator module A23, schematic diagram.
16
network contributes a stability f actor about consisting of capacitors C10 and
40 times greater than that of a free-run- C11 and inductor L1 prevent rf
ning oscillator. leakage into the +10-volt dc supply.
a. Sidestep Oscillator Module. The rf output from Q2 can be meas-
(1) The audio signal from speech am- ured at test jack J2.
plifier limiter module A22 (para b. Quarter-Wave Network Module A19.
12) is coupled to the sso through (1) The quarter-wave network is made
coupling capacitor C6 and isolating up of two pi-networks: one for the
resistors R8 and R7, across diode high band and one for the low band.
CR1. Diode CR1 is a variable ca- Each network has a crystal which
pacitance diode. When the audio is used to control the sso fre-
signal is applied across the diode, quency. BAND switch S4 (fig. 88)
the effective capacitance of CR1 on the front panel s e 1 e c ts the
changes as the voltage across it proper network.
varies. These capacitance changes (2) Each network is an artificial
are coupled through capacitor C4, quarter-wave line. An impedance
which blocks the audio signal, or reactance atone end is reflected
across the sso tuned circuit con- as the exact opposite at the other
sisting of inductor T1 and capaci- end. This permits the use of a low-
tor C4. The effective capacitance impedance crystal with the high-
of the tuned circuit, and the output impedance tank circuit in the sso.
frequency, varies at the audio rate; If the crystal were connected di-
therefore, the output frequency of rectly into the tuned circuit, devia-
the sso is frequency-modulated. tion of the sso frequency would not
(2) The ac component of the emitter be possible. Inductors L1 and L2
current flows through part of T1, are used to control the amount of
coupling capacitor Cl, and swamp- coupling between the crystal and
ing resistor R2 to the emitter of the tuned circuit.
Q1. This signal induces an in-phase
voltage at the top of T1 which is
coupled through coupling capacitor 15. Variable Frequency Oscillator Module A9
C2 to the base of Q1 to sustain os- (fig. 10)
cillation. Resistors R3 and R4 pro- Variable frequency oscillator (vfo) Q1
vide base-to-emitter bias for Q1. functions as the local oscillator during re-
Resistor R1 is the emitter load ception and as the master oscillator during
resistor. Resistors R5 and R6 es- transmission. The vfo is a modified Hartley
tablish a dc bias for CR1. Capacitor type that generates a signal in the fre-
C5 is an rf bypass capacitor for quency range of 41.45 mc to 64.45 mc. The
the audio input circuit. tank circuit for Q1 receives an automatic
(3) The frequency-modulated rf output phase control (ape) dc voltage from module
from the oscillator tuned circuit All (para 29). The apc voltage is applied
is coupled from a tap on T1 through to capacitance diode CR1. The effective
capacitor C7 to the base of buffer capacitance of CR1 varies with the voltage
Q2. The buffer stage isolates the applied to it. Capacitance diode CR1 is
sso from load variations. The buf- connected across the vfo tank. Any vfo out-
fer output is developed across the put frequency deviation will develop an er-
tuned circuit consisting of trans- ror signal and cause a change in the apc
former T2 and capacitor C8. Re- voltage that will change the effective ca-
sistors R9 and R10 establish the pacitance of CR1; this condition causes
base-to-emitter bias for Q2. Re- the vfo output to return to its proper fre-
sistor R11 is the emitter voltage quency. The vfo has outputs to the fss buf-
dropping resistor; capacitor C9 is fer, the receiver mixer, and transmitter
the emitter bypass. A pi-type filter mixer. The fss buffer provides gain,
17
Figure 8. Sidestep oscillator module A20, schematic diagram.
isolation, and proper match for the vfo quency of the vfo. The automatic
signal applied to the fss. An output from phase control voltage from module
the vfo is directly fed to receiver mixer All can be measured at test jack
A5 (para 8) and heterodyned with the in- J3.
coming signals to produce the 11.5-mc if. (3) Resistors R1 and R2 develop the
The third vfo output is applied to trans- base bias for Q1. Resistor R3 is the
mitter mixer Q2. emitter swamping resistor. The rf
a. VFO Q1. signal at the tuned circuit can be
(1) Collector-to-emitter fee db a c k measured at test jack J4.
through capacitor C2 and inductor (4) Capacitor C8 (in the main frame
T1 maintains oscillation in Q1. The (fig. 88)) is an rf bypass capacitor
tuned circuit consists of inductor on the automatic phase control
Tl, trimmer capacitor C9 fixed voltage line. Capacitor C9 (in the
capacitor C10, capacity diode CR1, main frame (fig. 88) is an rf bypass
and ganged tuning capacitors C1D capacitor on the +10-volt regulated
C1E which are varied by the tuning input line.
controls on the front panel. Trim- b. Frs Buffer Amplifier Q3.
mer capacitor C8 controls the ef- (1) The output from the vfo is applied
fect of CR1. through isolation resistor R11 and
(2) Input error signals from the fre- coupling capacitor C11 to the base
quency synthesizer system are of Q3. Transformer T2 couples the
applied through a filter network output of this stage to the input of
consisting of inductor L4 and ca- the fss.
pacitor C7, and through isolating (2) Voltage-divider resistors R12 and
resistor R9 to capacitance diode R13 develop the fixed base bias for
CR1. The capacitance of CR1 var- Q3. Resistor R14 is the emitter
ies directly with the applied error swamping resistor. Capacitor C12
voltage to correct the output fre- is the rf bypass capacitor for the
18
Figure 9. Quarter-wave network module A19, schematic diagram.
emitter. Inductor L3 and capacitor A8 amplifies the rf input from variable

C13 form a filter network to pre- frequency oscillator module A9 (para 15).
vent rf leakage into the power sup- a. The signal from A9 is coupled from
ply. the top of the tapped secondary of T1
c. Transmitter Mixer Q2. through coupling capacitor C2 to the emit-
(1) The transmitter mixer functions ter of Q1 and from the bottom of the sec-
only during transmission. The sso ondary of T1 through coupling capacitor
input from A20 (para 14) is applied C3 to the base of Q1. The output at the
through isolation resistors R8 and collector is coupled through BAND switch
R16 and coupling capacitor C3 to SIB to either the low- or high-band tuned
the base of Q2. The vfo output is output circuit.
applied through isolating resistors b. Separate tuned output circuits are
R10 and R16 and coupling capacitor used for the high and low bands. Switch S1
C3 to the base of Q2. Resistor R4 selects the circuit when the BAND switch
is a dc return. The two signals are on the front panel is positioned.
heterodyned in this stage; the out- (1) Low band. The low-band tuned out-
put from the collector is applied to put circuit consists of inductor T2,
transmitter first rf amplifier mod- fixed capacitor C7, trimmer ca-
ule A8. The collector returns to pacitor C6, and ganged tuning ca-
ground through the primary of T1 pacitor C1C (fig. 88).
in module A8 (para 16). (2) High band. The high-band tuned
(2) Voltage divider resistors R5 and output circuit consists of trans-
R6 develop the fixed bias for Q2. former T3, fixed capacitor C10,
Resistor R7 is the emitter swamp- trimmer capacitor C9, and ganged
ing resistor. Capacitor C5 is an tuning capacitor C1C.
emitter rf bypass capacitor for the c. Capacitors C4 and C5 and inductor
Q2. Inductor L1 and capacitor C6 L3 form a filter which prevents rf varia-
form a filter network to prevent rf tions from reaching the -45-volt dc supply.
leakage into the power supply. The combination of resistors R2 and R3
provides fixed bias, and resistor R1 is the
16. Transmitter First Rf Amplifier emitter swamping resistor for Q1. Induc-
tors L1 and L2 are rf chokes. Capacitor
Module A8 C8 is inserted into the high-band output
(fig. 11)
tuned circuitry by S1C to shift the effective
Transmitter first rf amplifier module range of ganged tuning capacitor C1C by
19
Figure 10.
20
Figure 11.
21
decreasing the total capacitance. The rf collector is coupled through BAND switch
input to module A8 can be measured at S1A to either the low- or high-band tuned
test jack J2. output circuit.
d. Inductor L2 and capacitors C6 and b. Separate tuned output circuits are
C7 (in the main frame (fig. 88)) form a used for the high and low bands. Switch S1
filter in the +10-volt regulated input to selects the circuit when the BAND switch
module A8. is positioned.
(1) Low band The low-band tuned out-
17. Transmitter Second Rf Amplifier
put circuit consists of inductor T3,
Module A7 trimmer capacitor C9, and ganged
(fig. 12)
tuning capacitor C1B (fig. 88),
Transmitter second rf amplifier module which is varied by the tuning con-
A7 amplifies the signal from transmitter trols on the front panel. The output
first rf amplifier module A8 (para 16). is applied from a tap on T3 through
Module A7 consists of a single transistor S1B to A6.
amplifier, a BAND switch, and a tuned (2) High band. The high-band tuned
output circuit. output circuit consists of the pri-
a. The output signal from A8 is coupled mary of transformer T2, fixed
from the top of the center-tapped second- capacitor C8, trimmer capacitor
ary of T1 through coupling capacitor C4 C6, and ganged tuning capacitor
to the emitter of Q1 and from the bottom CIB. The output is applied from
of the secondary through coupling capac- the secondary of T2 through SIB
itor C5 to the base of Q1. The output at the to A6.
Figure 12. Transmitter second rf amplifier module A7, schematic d i a g r a m ,
22
c. Capacitors C2 and C3 and inductor (2) High band. The high-band tuned
L1 prevent rf variations from reaching the output circuit consists of inductor
-45-volt dc supply. The combination of T3, trimmer capacitor C8, and
resistors R2 and R3 provides fixed bias, ganged tuning capacitor C1A. The
and resistor R1 is the emitter swamping OUTPUT is applied from a tap of
resistor Q1. Inductors L2 and L3 are rf T3 through S1A and coupling ca-
chokes. Capacitor C7 is inserted into the pacitor C3 in the main frame (fig.
high-band output tank circuit by S1C to 88) to the grid of V1.
shift the effective range of ganged tuning C . The combinations of inductor L1 and
capacitor C1B by decreasing the total ca- capacitor C3, choke rf L2 and capacitor
pacitance. The rf input to module A7 can C4, and rf choke L3 and capacitor C5 keep
be measured at test jack J2. rf variations out of the -45-volt dc supply.
d. Inductor L1 and capacitor C5 (in the Resistor R1 is an emitter swamping re-
main frame (fig. 88) ) form a filter in the sistor. The combination of resistors R2
-45-volt input to module A7. and R3 form a voltage divider which sup-
plies base bias for transistor Q1. Capac-
itor C7 is inserted into the high-band out-
18. Transmitter Intermediate Power Amplifier
put tank circuit by S1C to shift the effective
Module A6 range of ganged tuning capacitor C1A by
(fig. 13)
decreasing the total capacitance. The rf
Transmitter intermediate power ampli- input to module A6 can be measured at
fier module A6 amplifies the rf input from test jack J2.
transmitter second rf amplifier module
A7 (para 17). The transmitter intermediate
19. Power Amplifier A29
power amplifier module consists of a
(fig. 14)
single intermediate power amplifier, a
BAND switch, and a tuned output circuit Power amplifier A29 is a pentode-type
for each of the two bands. The output of rf amplifier stage which, in conjunction
A6 is applied to the grid of tube V1. with power amplifier (pa) tank module A2
a. The signal from A7 is coupled from (para 20), develops the required rf power
the top of the center-tapped secondary of output to the antenna. Plate, screen-grid,
T1 through coupling capacitor C1 to the and bias voltages for power amplifier tube
emitter of Q1 and from the bottom of the V1 are supplied by de-to-de converter
secondary of T1 through coupling capac- module A1 (para 31). The dc filament volt-
itor C2 to the base of Q1. The output at age is supplied by battery BT1.
the collector of Q1 is coupled through a. The rf input signal from transmitter
BAND switch S1B to the low-or high-band ipa A6 (para 18) is applied through par-
tuned output circuit. asitic suppression network Z1 to the con-
b. Separate tuned output circuits are trol grid of V1. The rf signal at the plate
used for the high and low bands. Switch of tube V1 is developed across the low-
S1 selects the proper circuit when the or high-band tank circuits located in power
BAND switch is positioned. amplifier (pa) tank circuit module A2.
(1) Low band. The low-band tuned out- b. A bias voltage of -39.5 volts dc is
put circuit consists of inductor T2, applied to the control grid of tube V1
trimmer capacitor C6, and ganged through resistor R2, inductor L1, and sup-
tuning capacitor C1A (fig. 88), pressor network Z1. Resistor R1 is a
which is varied by the tuning con- voltage dropping resistor in series with
trols on the front panel to select the -45-input circuit. There is a constant
the desired frequency within the voltage drop of approximately 5.5 volts
low band. The output is applied from dc across Zener diode CR1 which is ap-
a tap of T2 through S1A and coup- plied a fixed grid bias voltage for V1. The
ling capacitor C3 in the main frame combination of inductor L1, resistor R2,
(fig. 88) to the grid of V1. and capacitor C1 prevents rf leakage into
23
Figure 13. Transmitter ipa module A6, schematic diagram.
the -45-volt supply. A pi-type filter con- consists of transformer T1, trimmer ca-
sisting of capacitors C2 and C5 and induc- pacitor C1, and inductor L1. When S1 is in
tor L2 prevents rf variations on the fila- the high-band position, the tuned circuit
ment of tube V2 and rf leakage into the consists of transformer T2, trimmer ca-
2.5-volt filament supply. The combination pacitor C1, and inductor L1. When S1 is in
of plate inductor L3 and bypass capacitor C5. Tuning capacitor C2B (fig. 88) is con-
C4 prevents rf leakage into the +125-volt nected in parallel with either T1 or T2
power supply. Resistor R3 is a screen- through S1C.
grid voltage dropping resistor; capacitor b. During transmission, the output from
C3 is the screen-grid bypass capacitor. transmitter power amplifier tube V1 is
applied from J7 through S1AJ1, contact 2
and contact 1 or 3 of S1A to the selected
20. Power Amplifier Tank Module A2
tuned circuits (a above). The output signal
(fig. 15)
from the tuned circuit is applied through
Power amplifier tank module A2 is used contact 1 or 3 and contact 2 of S1D,
as both the output load for power amplifier through terminal 1 of 2AJ1 and terminal
tube V1 (para 19) (in A29), and as the input 11 of J7 to the antenna. Input to the re-
circuit for receiver first rf amplifier mod- ceiver through S1B is prevented by the
ule A3 (para 6). Module A2 consists of a energized contacts of relay K1 (fig. 88).
low- and a high-band tuned circuit, and a During reception, signals from the antenna
BAND switch. are passed through S1D to the selected
a. BAND switch S1 selects one of two tuned circuit. Relay K1 (fig. 88) is not en-
frequency bands. When S1 is in the low- ergized. During reception, energy from
band position (30-52), the tuned circuit the tuned circuit is coupled by inductor
24
Figure 14. Power amplifier A29, schematic diagram.
L1 (low band) or capacitor C4 (high band) ratio of capacitance change on the high
through switch SIB, through pin 3 of 2AJ1 band.
and pin 9 of J7 to receiver first rf ampli-
fier module A3. 21. Antenna Looding Network A28
c. On the low-band tuned circuit, the slug (fig. 16)
in transformer T1 is an alignment adjust-
ment for the low frequency end, while The antenna loading network matches the
capacitor C1 is an alignment adjustment short or long antenna to the receiver-
for the high frequency end. Inductor L1 transmitter by means of tuned coils and
provides high-impedance coupling for the switching assemblies.
receiver to minimize effects of lead length a. When the long antenna is used, a
and to reduce spurious responses and plunger and a leaf spring engages micro-
radiations. switches S2 and S3, closing contacts 2 and
d. On the high-band tuned circuit, the 3 on each switch. The rf signal is applied
slug in transformer T2 is an alignment through contacts of BAND switch S1 to the
adjustment for the low frequency end, power amplifier tank (C2A stator) (fig.
while capacitor C2 is an alignment adjust- 88). Inductor L4 is inserted in parallel to
ment for the high frequency end. Capacitor change the electrical length of the antenna
C4 provides high-impedance coupling for during operation in the low band.
the receiver on the high band. Capacitor b. When the short antenna is used,
C5, in conjunction with capacitor C4, pro- microswitches S2 and S3 are not actuated.
vides the proper impedance matching to The rf signal from the antenna is applied
the receiver. Capacitor C3 is connected directly to switch S1. When the short an-
in series with C2B by S1C to reduce the tenna is used inductor L4 is not connected.
25
Figure 15. Power amplifier tank module A2, schematic diagram.
c. The tuning controls tune inductors 41.45-mc to 64.45-mc output of the

L1, L2, and L3, which are in series with fss buffer in A9. The combination
capacitors C2, C1, and C3, respectively, of resistors R1 and R2 plus the
to resonate the antenna in the low and high input impedance to Q1 provides the
bands. When the BAND switch is in the low proper termination for the vfo buf-
position, inductor L3 and capacitor C3 are fer amplifier. Capacitor Cl is a
placed in the circuit; when the BAND switch coupling capacitor. The amplifier
is in the high position, inductors L1 and output of Q1 is coupling capacitor.
L2 and capacitors C2 and Cl are placed in The amplified output of Q1 is
the circuit. coupled to the fss first mixer
transformer T1. Resistor R6 in-
creases the frequency response of
22. Frequency Synthesizer System First
T1.
Mixer Module A14
(fig. 17) (2) Resistors R3 and R4 form a voltage
divider which develops the fixed
The fss first mixer module, A14, heter- portion of the emitter-to-base bias
odynes the output of vfo module A9 (para for transistor Q1. Resistor R5 is
15) with the output of l-me spectrum gen- the emitter swamping resistor.
erator module A15 (para 23) to produce a Capacitor C2 is an rf bypass ca-
band of frequencies around 53 mc. This pacitor for the emitter of Q1.
output is supplied to the 53-mc filter A13 b. The signal inducted to the secondary
(para 25). The fss first mixer contains the windings of transformer T1 is coupled
fss first buffer amplifier and a mixer through push-pull diodes CR1 and CR2 to
circuit. the tuned primary of transformer T2. Ca-
a. Fss First Mixer Buffer Q1. pacitor C3 and the primary of transformer
(1) Fss first mixer buffer Q1 provides T2 form a tuned circuit. The input from
isolation and low-power gain. It 1-mc spectrum generator A15 is applied
has sufficient bandwidth to pass the through a pulse-shaping network, consist-
26
Figure 16. Antenna loading network A28, schematic d i a g r a m ,
Figure 17. First mixer module A14, schematic diagram.
27
ing of diode CR3, capacitor C5, and re- transformer T2 to 7 mc. Capacitor C4 is
sistor R8, to the center tap of the primary an emitter bypass. Resistor R5 is the
of transformer T2. It is terminated in a emitter swamping resistor for Q2. The
tuned network consisting of capacitor C4, 10-volt dc supply is decoupled from the 1-
inductor L1, and resistor R7. The network mc spectrum generator by coil L1 and
is broadly tuned to 7 mc. The spectrum capacitor C6.
generator output contains the 1st through
the 12th harmonic of the fundamental 1-mc
pulse. Since the signal level of each suc- 24. Interval Oscillator Module A10
(fig. 19)
ceeding harmonic is reduced in amplitude
from the signal level of the preceding Interval oscillator module A10 supplies
harmonic, the terminating tuned network the fss with two crystal-controlled signals.
is used to equalize the harmonic compo- This module has two crystal-controlled
nents of the generated spectrum. oscillators; Q1, generates frequencies of
c. The mixed signal in the secondary of 46.85 mc to 47.75 mc in 100-kc incre-
transformer T2 is approximately 53 mc. ments, and Q2 generates frequencies of
The output of the fss first mixer is applied 5.55, 5.60, and 5.65 mc.
to 53-mc filter A13. The rf signal input a. 46.85-47.75-Mc Oscillator Q1.
from Q1 to the fss mixer can be measured (1) Transistor Q1 is connected in a
at test jack J2. The rf input from module crystal-controlled oscillator that
A15 to the fss mixer can be measured at uses 1 of 10 crystals. Crystal se-
test jack J3. lection is determined by the kc
tuning control on the front panel.
The toned collector circuit is com-
23. 1-Mc Spectrum Generator Module A15
posed of capacitors C1 and C2 and
(fig. 18)
the primary of transformer T1.
The 1-mc spectrum generator module, Oscillation is sustained by feeding
A15, produces harmonics of the l.0-mc back part of the energy in the col-
crystal-controlled oscillator for injection lector tank through capacitor C3
into fss mixer module A14 (para 22). and resistor R2. Resistor R4 is
Module A15 consists of a 1-mc cyrstal the tuned circuit damping resistor.
oscillator and a pulse generator. (2) Resistors R1 and R2 form a volt-
a. The 1-mc crystal oscillator is a mod- age divider network which develops
ified Hartley type. Transistor Q1, fixed the base bias for Q1. Resistor R3
capacitor C2, coil T1, and crystal Y1 form is the emitter swamping resistor.
the oscillator circuit. Resistors R1 and R2 Resistor R18, inductor L1, and
form a voltage divider which provides the capacitor C 16 form a filter net-
fixed bias portion of emitter-base bias. work in the +10-volt supply to Q1.
Resistor R3 is the emitter swamping re- The rf output of Q1 can be meas-
sistor for Q1. Capacitor C1 bypasses the ured at test jack J2.
base to ground. b. Oscillator 5.55, 5.60, or 5.65 Mc Q2.
b. The sinusoidal 1-mc oscillations are (1) Transistor Q2 is connected in a
applied to pulse generator Q2 through crystal-controlled oscillator cir-
coupling capacitor C3. The pulse generator cuit that uses one of four crystals
is normally cut off by the reverse base (three frequencies) to generate the
bias applied through, R4, and conducts frequency reference for p has e
only on the negative half cycles of the 1- comparison in module A17. The
mc signal. a positive pulse, rich in har- tuned collector circuit is made up
monics, is developed in the collector out- of capacitors C9 and C10 and the
put. This output is applied across the primary of transformer T2. Oscil-
transformer T2 and coupled to first mixer lation is sustained by feeding back
module A14. part of the energy in the collector
c. Capacitor C5 broadly tunes output circuit from the junction of C9 and
28
Figure 18. 1-mc spectrum generator module A15, schematic diagram.
C10 to the selected crystal ((2) be- Y11 (5.65 mc) will be selected
low), and the contacts of S1A to the through contacts 8 and 11 of S1A;
emitter of Q2; this action com- this action completes the regen-
pletes the regenerative circuit. erative circuit to the emitter of
(2) Crystal selection is determined by Q2. If the RT-505/PRC-25 is op-
the operating mode (received or erating on a 50-kc channel (31.15
transmit) and by the frequency se- mc, 74.25 mc, etc.), S1A will be
lected by the kc tuning control. turned clockwise one position from
When the RT-505/PRC-25 is in the that shown and crystal Y12 (5.60
receive mode, +10 volts is applied mc) will be connected through con-
through normally closed contacts 4 tacts 8 and 9 of S1A; this action
and 6 of front-end relay K1 (fig. completes the regenerative circuit
88), through pin E of connectors J12 to the emitter of Q2.
and A10J1, and current-limiting (3) When the RT-505/PRC-25 is in the
resistor R5 to the anode of CR1. transmit mode, front-end relay K1
This positive voltage forward (fig. 88) is energized, contacts 4
biases CR1; the diode conducts and 6 open, and +10 volts is no
heavily and allows the regenerative longer available for diode CR1. The
circuit to crystals Y11 and Y12 to diode is now reverse-biased and
be completed. If the RT-505/PRC- prevents the selection of crystal
25 is operating on a 100-kc channel Y11 or Y12. Relay K1 contacts 4
(31.10 mc, 74.20 mc, etc), S1A will and 7 are closed and apply+ 10 volts
be in the position shown and crystal through pin K of connectors J12
29
and A10J1 and current-limiting re- ing network consisting of capacitors C6
sistor R7 to the anode of CM. This and C7 and transformer T3 to fss second
positive voltage forward biases mixer module A12 (para 26). This circuit
CR2; the diode conducts heavily and minimizes spurious frequency injection
allows the regenerative circuit to into the second mixer.
crystals Y13 and Y14 to be com- b. The 53-mc signal from first mixer
pleted. If the RT-505/PRC-25 is modu1e A14 is coupled to the filter
operating on a 100-kc channel (31.0 through transformer T1 to a triple-tuned
mc, 74.20 mc, etc), S1A will be in network. The three tuned circuits are the
the position shown and crystal Y13 secondary of T1 and C1, L1 and C3, T2
(5.60 mc) will be selected through and C5. Capacitors C2 and C4 are coupl-
contacts 8 and 11 of S1A to com- ling capacitors. This triple-tuned network
plete the regenerative circuit to provides a 2-mc bandpass at the 3-
the emitter of Q2. If the RT-505/ decibel (db) points. The output of this net-
PRC-25 is operating on a 50-kc work is coupled to second mixer module
channel (31.15 mc, 74.25 mc, etc), A12.
S1A will be turned clockwise one
position from that shown and crys-
26. Frequency Synthesizer System Second
tal Y14 (5.55 mc) will be selected
through contacts 8 and 9 of S1A to Mixer Module A12
(fig. 21)
complete the regenerative circuit
to the emitter of Q2. The fss second mixer module heter-
(4) Capacitor C7 is an rf bypass ca- odynes the output from 53-mc filter A13
pacitor. Capacitor C8 is a coupling (para 25), with the 46.85-mc to 47.75-mc
capacitor between the base and output of the 100-kc interval oscillator
collector circuit. Resistors R10, (applied through A13) to produce an fss
R11, and R12 develop fixed bias; if. of 5.55, 5.60, or 5.65 mc. This output
resistors R8 and R9 are emitter is applied to fss if. amplifier module A18
swamping resistors for Q2. (para 27).
c. Buffer Q3. a. The 53-mc input from module A13
(1) The output from oscillator Q2 is is coupled through capacitor C1 to the
coupled through transformer T2 base of Q1. The 46.85-mc to 47.75-mc in-
to the base and emitter of Q3. The put from A13 is coupled through capacitor
buffer isolates Q2 from any varying C2 to the emitter of Q1. Transistor Q1
loading effects. heterodynes these two input signals; the
(2) Resistors R14, R15, and R16 de- resultant output signals at the collector of
velop fixed-base bias. Resistor Q1 are applied to the frequency selective
R13 is the emitter swamping resis- network.
tor. Capacitors C11, C12, and C13 b. The frequency selective network is
are rf bypass capacitors. Inductor composed of capacitors C4 through C7,
L2 and capacitor C15 form a de- variable transformers T1 and T2, and
coupling network to prevent variable inductors L1 and L2. The outputs
rf leakage into the power supply. from Q1 are the two original frequencies
The rf output from Q3 can be mess - plus their sum and difference. The fre-
ured at test jack J3. quency selective network passes only the
difference frequency. The network is a
25. 53-Mc FiIter A13 bandpass filter having a flat characteristic
resonant frequency of 5.6 mc.
(fig. 20)
c. Resistor R5 and capacitor C 3 filter
The 53-mc filter has two input signals. rf signals from the +10-volt dc supply.
a. The output signal from 100-kc in- Resistors R1 and R2 provide the fixed-base
terval oscillator module A 10 is coupled bias. Resistor R3 is the emitter swamping
through isolation resistor R1 and a match- resistor. Resistors R4 and R6 terminate
30
Figure 19.
31
Figure 20. 53-Mc filter module A 13, sthematic diagram
the filter properly and minimize varia- center-tapped secondary winding

tions due to the varying impedances of of transformer T1 neutralizes Q2
transistors. The rf output of module A12 (b below).
can be measured at test jack J2. (2) Resistors R1 and R2 form a volt-
age-divider network to develop the
fixed-bias portion of the emitter-
27. Frequency Synthesizer System If.
to-base bias of of Q1. Resistor R3
Amplifier Module A18 stabilizes the emitter current. Ca-
(fig. 22) pacitor C2 is an rf bypass capacitor
The fss if. amplifier module (A18) am- for the Q1 emitter.
plifies the 5.6-mc signal input from fss b. Second If. Amplifier Q2.
second mixer module A12 (para 26) and (1) The amplified 5.6-mc signal from
applies it to fss discriminator driver transistor Q1 is applied from the
module All (para 29) and phase compar- secondary of transformer T1
ator module (para 28) A17. The fss if. through coupling capacitor C6 to
amplifier circuit consists of two cascaded, the base of Q2. The signal output is
double-tuned, transformer-coupled am- developed across the tuned collec-
plifier stages. The signal amplitude ap- tor circuit consisting of variable
plied to the fss if. amplifier is sufficient conductor L2 and capacitor C8. The
to cause limiting. signal developed across this tuned
a. First If. Amplifier Q1. circuit is then coupled through ca-
(1) The 5.6-mc if. signal from module pacitor C9 to the second tuned cir-
A12 is coupled through capacitor cuit, consisting of capacitor C10
C1 to the base of Q1. The signal and the primary of transformer T2.
output is developed across the (2) Resistors R6 and R7 form a volt-
tuned collector circuit, consisting age-divider network which devel-
of variable inductor L1 and capac- ops the fixed-bias portion of the
itor C3. Resistor R4 broadens the emitter-to-base bias of Q2. Resis-
frequency response of the tuned tor R5 stabilizes the emitter cur-
circuit. The signa1 developed rent. Capacitor C7 is a bypass
across this tuned circuit is coupled capacitor for the top of trans-
through capacitor C4 to a second former T1. Resistor R8 is a load
tuned circuit consisting of capac- for the tuned circuit. Resistor R10,
itor C5 and the primary of tuned across the secondary of trans-
coupling transformer T1. The former T2, provides the proper
32
Figure 21. Second mixer module A12, schematic diagram.
output termination and minimizes be varying. The signal from A10 is genera-
variations due to discriminator ted by a crystal-controlled oscillator; this
loading. The combination of resis-. signal is the reference frequency. The dc
tor R9 and capacitor C11 prevents output voltage, proportional to the phase
rf leakage into the +10-volt dc sup- difference, is the automatic phase control
ply. (ape) voltage applied to vfo module A9 (para
(3) The rf output of module A18 can be 15). If the two signals are in phase, the apc
measured at test jack J2. voltage will assume a reference level to
maintain the vfo output frequency. If a
phase difference is detected, an error volt-
28. Phase Comparator Module A17
age is developed in the phase comparator.
(fig. 23)
This change in apc voltage opposes any
Phase comparator module A17 contains change in vfo output frequency by returning
phase comparator driver Q1 and the phase the vfo output to its correct frequency, and
comparator. The phase comparator com- establishes a phase lock.
pares the phase of the signals from f ss if. a. Phase Comparator Driver. The input
module A18 (para 27) with those from in- from fss if. module A18 is coupled through
terval oscillator module Al0 (para 24). The capacitor Cl to the base of phase com-
input signal from A18 is initially generated parator driver Q1. The amplified signal is
by the vfo; the frequency of this signal may coupled to the phase comparator by
33
Figure 22. Speech amplifier limiter module A18, schematic diagram.
transformer T1. Resistors R1 and R2 form CR1, and E2 to CR2. (The E desig-
a voltage divider which provides the fixed- nations are for purposes of refer-
bias portion of the emitter-to-base bias. ence only.)
Emitter resistor R3 establishes the fixed (2) The phase comparator also re-
portion of the emitter-to-base bias and ceives an input signal from crys -
stabilizes the emitter current. Capacitor tal-controlled interval oscillator
C2 is a bypass capacitor for the Q1 module A10 which is injected at the
emitter. Capacitors C5 and C6 and in- center tap of transformer T1 and
ductor L1 form a pi-filter which prevents the junction of diodes CR1 and CR2.
any rf signals from entering the 10-volt This signal voltage (E3) is exactly
dc Supply 90° out-of-phase with voltages E1
b. Phase Comparator. The phase com- and E2 when the frequency of the
parator consists of the tapped secondary 5.6-mc input, developed initially by
winding of T1, coupling capacitors C3 and the vfo, is the same as the crystal-
C4, diodes CR1 and CR2, and resistors R4 controlled input frequency. This
and R5. The output voltage of the phase condition exists when the vfo is on
comparator depends on the phase relation- frequency. When the two input sig-
ship of the two signals applied to the cir- nals are 90° out-of-phase, the dc
cuit. The voltage output is pivoted about a output voltage, which is the vecto-
+3.5-volt dc reference level at the junction rial sum of voltages E1 plus E3 and
of resistors R6 and R7 which is applied to E2 plus E3, will be at the +3.5-volt
the center tap of transformer T1 and, reference level.
through the secondary winding of trans- (3) Diode CR1 receives a voltage equal
former T3 in module A10, to the junction to the sum of El and E3; diode CR2
of diodes CR1 and CR2. This voltage is receives a voltage equal to the sum
established by the divider action of resis- of E2 and E3. The diodes rectify the
tors R6 and R7 which are connected across signals, and dc voltages appear
the 10-volt power supply. Capacitor C7 is across load resistors R4 and R5.
an rf bypass capacitor. When the signal voltages are equal,
(1) The signal induced in the secondary the output voltages across resis-
of T1 is coupled through capacitors tors R4 and R5 are equal, and the
C3 and C4 to diodes CR1 and CR2, total voltage across both resistors,
respectively, producing equal and in respect to the junction of resis-
opposite voltages. E1 is applied to tors R4 and R5, is canceled out,
34
Figure 23. Phase comparator module A17, schematic diagram.
since E1 and E2 voltages are ex- function of vfo frequency shift (in-
actly 180° out-of -phase. crease or decrease). When the fre-
(4) If the vfo frequency increases or quency increases, the dc output
decreases, changing the 5.6-mc in- voltage is less than the reference
put signal, the 90° vector relation- level; when the frequency in-
ship between the E1 and E2 signal creases, it is greater than the ref-
and the E3 signal no longer exists. erence level. The phase compara-
The change in frequency is equiva- tor output voltage is applied
lent to an E1-E2 phase shift with through the antihunt network mod-
respect to E3. The resultant vec- ule All to the apc line. The change
tors of E1 plus E3 and E2 plus E3 in apc voltage corrects the vfo out-
are no longer the same l e n g t h put frequency and returns the apc
(since the 90° vector relationship of voltage to the reference level when
E1-E2 and E3 no longer exists), and a phase lock is established.
the ratio of voltage across the (6) The control voltage output of mod-
diodes changes. The voltages de- ule A17 can be measured at test
veloped across load resistors R4 jack J2.
and R5 are now unequal, and the dc
output will be changed from the 29. Frequency Synthesizer System Discrim-
+3.5-volt reference level. inator Driver Module All
(fig. 24)
(5) The amount the reference level is
changed is a function of the phase The fss discriminator driver module All
difference detected in the compar- extends the captive range of the fss. It re-
ator; the direction of change is a ceives two input signals and develops the
35
apc voltage in its output circuit. The two at the junction of resistors R8 and R9. The
input signals are the fss if. signal from the larger portion of the discriminator voltage
fss if. amplifier module A18 (para 27) and is developed across resistor R8, and is ap-
a dc voltage from phase comparator mod- plied in series with the comparator output
ule A17 (para 28). The apc voltage is ap- to the antihunt network (d below) through
plied to the capacitance diode circuit of the coupling capacitor C9 as the ac portion of
vfo. If aphase-locked condition exists (that the apc voltage. The remainder of the dis -
is, if the vfo is on frequency), the apc volt- criminator voltage is developed across re-
age will assume the reference level to sistor R9; its polarity is opposite to that
maintain the vfo output on frequency. If the developed across resistor R8. This volt-
vfo output frequency changes, the fss dis - age, plus the phase comparator output dc
criminator will develop ac and dc hunting voltage, is applied to the antihunt network
voltages. These error signals change the (d below) through discriminator load re-
apc voltage applied to the frequency con- sistor R10 as the dc portion of the apc
trol circuit of the vfo, which shifts the vfo voltage. Resistor R7, together with capac-
output frequent y to within the pull-in and itors C7 and C8, determine the reaction
hold-in range of the phase comparator. time of the discriminator driver.
a. A signal from the fss if. module A18 d. Resistors R11 and R12 together with
is applied to the base of discriminator capacitor C10 form the antihunt network
driver Q1 through coupling capacitor C1. for the fss loop. Both the ac and the dc
The signal is amplified by Q1 and applied portions of the apc voltage are applied
to the discriminator (b below). Base bias- through this network to the vfo. However,
ing voltage for Q1 is provided by voltage- the main effect will occur on the ac portion
divider resistors R1 and R2. Resistor R3 (developed by the fss discriminator) since
is the emitter swamping resistor for Q1. the higher the frequency of the error volt-
Resistors R4 and R13 provide series and age, the higher the attenuation (by virtue of
shunt loading, respectively, for the collec- the ac shunting through capacitor C10). To
tor tuned circuit. Capacitor C2 is an rf prevent regeneration, this antihunt net-
bypass capacitor for the Q1 emitter. work damps the fss loop gain and stops the
b. The discriminator is a Travis-type. hunting action of the vfo when the phase
The tuned circuit, consisting of the trans- comparator acquires control of the vfo.
former T1 secondary and capacitor C3, is e. Choke L1 and capacitor C11 form a
tuned to 5.95 mc. The tuned circuit, con- decoupling network to prevent rf from
sisting of transformer T2 secondary and being coupled into the power supply.
capacitor C4, is tuned to 5.25 mc. At the
center frequency of 5.6 mc, both tank cir-
cuits have equal currents induced in them. 30. Voltage Regulator Module A16
The voltage rectified by diode CR1 and (fig. 25)
developed across resistor R5, is equal to The voltage regulator circuit supplies
the voltage rectified by diode CR2 and de- the entire fss system, including the vfo,
veloped across resistor R6. Since these with a regulated+ 10 volts dc. The regulator
voltages are equal but of opposite polarity, uses a high power germanium transistor
there is no output. At frequencies above (Q1) as a series regulator in conjunction
or below the signal center frequency, the with a medium-power silicon transistor
voltages developed across resistors R5 (Q2). Transistor Q2 operates as a dc am-
and R6 are unequal and a resultant output plifier. The combination of resistor R5 and
voltage is developed. Capacitors C5 and diode CR2 forma voltage-divider network,
C6 rf filter capacitors across load resis- with diode CR2 maintaining the base of the
tors R5 and R6, respectively. The discrim- dc amplifier at a constant reference volt-
inator output can be measured at test jack age. The combination of diode CR1 and
J2 . emitter resistor R4 forms a voltage di-
c. The discriminator output is pivoted vider. Any variation in output voltage
about the control voltage input from A17 appears across resistor R4, since CR1
36
Figure 24. Fss discriminator module A11, schematic diagram.
maintains a constant voltage drop. When the 31. Dc-to-Dc Converter Module Al
output voltage increases due to a decrease (fig. 26)
in load or an increase in the input voltage,
a proportional positive voltage increase The dc-to-dc converter module supplies
appears at the emitter of dc amplifier Q2 power amplifier tube V1 with plate voltage
and results in more current flow through during transmission. The dc-to-dc con-
Q2. The base of series regulator Q1 goes verter uses the 12.5-volt dc battery supply
more positive; conduction through Q1 de- input. Module Al consists of a transis-
creases, which effectively increases the torized power oscillator, transformer, and
impedance of series regulator Q1. The rectifier circuit.
effect is a decrease in the regulator out- a. Transistors Q1 and Q2 are connected
put; the circuit has compensated for the in a common collector power oscillator
increase in output voltage. The opposite circuit which operates at 4,000 cps. The
series of events takes place when the out- primary windings, terminals 4 and 6, of
put voltage decreases because of a load transformer T1 provide the load for the
increase or input voltage decrease. The transistors. Regenerative feedback to sus -
regulator provides two +10-volt outputs, tain oscillation is applied to the base of
one filtered and one unfiltered. The fil- each transistor from the winding, between
tered output is filtered by a pi-filter net- terminals 5 and 7, of transformer T1. The
work consisting of coil L1 and capacitors 12.5-volt dc input to module Al is applied
C1 and C2. The filtered output is supplied when the function switch is at ON and the
to modules A14 (para 22) and A15 (para23). handset push-to-talk switch is closed. As
The unfiltered output is supplied to the a result of circuit unbalance, a larger cur-
remainder of the circuits requiring regu- rent flows through one of the transistors
lated +10 volts. The unregulated input and its associated portion of the primary
voltage to module A16 can be measured at winding of transformer T1 when the supply
test jack J2; the regulated output voltage voltage is initially applied to the oscillator.
from module A16 can be measured at test (1) Assume that the larger current is
jack J3. flowing through transistor Q1. This
37
Figure 25. Voltage regulator module A16, schematic diagram.
condition induces a voltage in the tors Q1 and Q2 switch rapidly from

feedback winding of transformer cutoff to saturation, the current in
T1. The voltzage is applied to the transformer T1 is essentially a
bases of the transistors, causing square wave.
Q1 to conduct even more, and driv- b. Inductor L1 and capacitors C1 and C2
ing Q2 further into cutoff. The flux form a pi-type filter circuit which pre-
in the core of transformer T1 vents voltage peaks developed in module
changes at a nearly constant rate Al from reaching the 12.5-volt supply. A
until the core is saturated. When voltage divider, consisting of resistors
saturation occurs, no voltage is de- RI and R2, establishes the fixed base bias
veloped in the feedback windings of for transistors Q1 and Q2.
transformer T1. The feedback volt- c. The rectifier circuit consits of two
age to transistor Q1 decreases full-wave rectifiers. The 125-volt output
rapidly and drives transistor Q1 is rectified by diodes CR1 and CR4 and
into cutoff. filtered by capacitor C4. The -45-volt out-
(2) When transistor Q1 cuts off, the put is rectified by diodes CR2 and CR3,
flux in the core of transformer T1 and filtered by inductor L2 and capacitor
decreases slightly to induce volt- C3. Resistors R4 and R5 are isolating re-
ages of opposite polarity across sistors which prevent circuit loading by
its windings. This reversal of po- test equipment probes placed at voltage
larity drives transistor Q1 further test jacks J2 and J3. Resistor R3 is a
into cutoff and causes transistor bleeder for the +125-volt output.
Q2 to conduct. The current through
Q2 increases until the transformer 32. Test Points
core saturates, and the cycle then
repeats. During each half cycle, The RT-505/PRC-25 has 28 test points
the transformer flux changes from located on 21 modules which enable a main-
saturation in one direction to sat- tenance man to locate a faulty module
uration in the other. Since transis- rapidly. These test points are normally
38
used in conjunction with Test Set, Elec- this test point, with no signal being re-
tronic Plug-in Circuit AN/GRM-55 to iso- ceived, is 20 millivolts.
late a faulty module at the organizational e. Module A6. Module A6 has one test
level. If usedproperly, however, the signal point: J2. Test point J2 permits the rf
voltages at these test points will expedite signal input to A6 (from A7) to be checked.
maintenance effort at higher echelons. A A typical rf signal level at this test point,
listing of the modules which are equipped with the RT-505/PRC-25 in transmit con-
with test points and a description of the dition, is 3 volts.
signal to be expected at the test point are f. Module A7. Module A7 has one test
given below. point: J2. Test point J2 permits the rf sig-
a. Module A1. Module A1 has two test nal input to A7 (from A8) to be checked. A
points: J2 and J3. Test point J2 permits typical rf signal level at this test point,
the -45-volt output of the converter to be with the RT-505/PRC-25 in transmit con-
checked. Test point J3 permits the +125- dition, is 1.5 volts.
volt output of the converter to be checked. g. Module A8. Module A8 has one test
b. Module A3. Module A3 has one test point: J2. Test point J2 permits the rf in-
point: J2. Test point J2 permits the rf put from the transmitter mixer (in A9) to
signal input to A3 (from A2) to be checked. be checked. A typical rf signal level at this
A typical rf signal level at this test point, test point, with the RT-505/PRC-25 in
with a 20-millivolt, 65-mc signal injected transmit condition, is 0.5 volt.
at the ANT connector, is 25 millivolts. h. Module A9. Module A9 has two test
c. Module A4. Module A4 has one test points: J3 and J4. Test point J3 permits
point: J2. Test point J2 permits the rf the input apc voltage (from A11) to be
signal input to A4 (from A3 to be checked). checked. A typical apc voltage level, with
A typical rf signal level at this test point, the vfo properly aligned, is +3.8 volts dc.
with a 20-millivolt, 65-mc signal injected Test point J4 permits the output of vfo Q1
at the ANT connector, is 80 millivolts. (in A9) to be checked. A typical rf signal
d. Module A5. Module A5 has one test level of the vfo is 0.3 volt.
point: J2. Test point J2 permits sampling i. Module A10. Module A10 has two test
the vfo input. A typical rf signal level at points: J2 and J3. Test point J2 permits
Figure 26. Dc-to-dc converter module A1, schematic diagram.
39
the output of oscillator Q1 (in A10) to be nal level at this test point, with a 20-milli-
checked. A typical rf signal level at this volt, 65-mc signal injected at the ANT
test point is 0.2 volt. Test point J3 permits connector, is 40 millivolts. Test point J4
the output of oscillator Q2 (in A10) to be permits the amplified output of A21 to be
checked. A typical rf signal level at this checked. A typical signal level at this test
test point is 1.8 volts. point, with the same input as above, is 600
j. Module A11. Module All has one test millivolts.
point: J2. Test point J2 permits the output r. Module A22. Module A22 has one test
of the discriminator (in A11) to be checked. point: J3. Test point J3 permits the am-
A typical discriminator output level, with plified output of the speech amplifier
the fss if. input disabled (by pressing S2 on limiter to be checked. A typical audio sig-
the main frame), is a l.5-volt peak-to- nal level at this test point, with a4-milli-
peak, 10-cps signal. volt input to A22 (RT-505/PRC-25 in
k. Module A12. Module A12 has one test transmit condition), is 1.8 volts.
point: J2. Test point J2 permits the fss if. s. Module 43. Module A23 has one test
output of A12 to be checked. A typical rf point: J3. Test point J3 permits the 150-
signal level at this test point is 80 milli- cps output of the tone generator to be
volts . checked. A typical audio signal level at
1. Module A14. Module A14 has two test this test point, with the RT-505/PRC-25
points: J2 and J3. Test point J2 permits in transmit condition, is 0.9 volt.
sampling the vfo input (from A9). Atypical t. Module A24. Module A24 has one test
rf signal level at this test point is 0.2 volt. point: J3. Test point J3 permits the 150-
Test point J3 permits sampling the cycle squelch tone signal, amplified in the
spectrum generator input (from A15). A frequency-selective circuits of the tone
typical rf signal level at this test point is squelch, to be checked. A typical audio
a l.5-volt peak-to-peak, l-mc pulse. signal level at this test point, with an rf
m. Module A16. Module A16 has two test signal having a 150-cps modulation de-
points: J2 and J3. Test point J2 permits tected by the receiver, or with the RT-
the unregulated voltage input (12 volts dc) 505/PRC-25 in transmit condition, is 1
from the battery to be checked. Test jack volt.
J3 permits the regulated voltage output (10 u. Module A25. Module A25 has two test
volts dc) to be checked. points: J3 and J4. Test point J3 permits
n. Module A17. Module A17 has one test the amplitude of the demodulated signal to
point: J2. Test point J2 permits the con- be checked. A typical audio signal level
trol voltage output of All to be checked. at this test point, with a 20-millivolt, 65-
A typical control voltage level, with the mc signal injected at the ANT connector,
reference frequency input from A10 dis- is 180 millivolts. Test point J4 permits
abled (by pressing S3 on the main frame), the amplified audio output of A25 to be
is +3.6 volts dc. checked. A typical audio signal level at
o. Module A18. Module A18 has one test this test point, with the above signal in-
point: J2. Test point J2 permits the fss if. jected at the ANT connector and with the
output of A18 to be checked. A typical rf VOLUME control fully clockwise, is 4.5
signal level at this test point is 0.3 volt. volts .
p. Module 40. Module A20 has one test
point: J2. Test point J2 permits the output
33. Power Distribution
of the sidestep oscillator to be checked.
A typical rf signal level at this test point, a. General. The primary power source
with the RF-505/PRC-25 in transmit con- for Radio Set AN/PRC-25 can be either
dition, is 0.7 volt. a Battery, Dry BA-386/PRC-25 or an
q. Module A21. Module A21 has two test Amplifier-Power Supply Group 0A-3633/
points: J3 and J4. Test point J3 permits GRC is used when the AN/PRC-25 is op-
the rf input to A31 (from the 11.5-mc crys- erated in a vehicle. The power distribution
tal filter] to be checked. A typical rf sig- described in b and c below is for use with
40
the 0A-3633/GRC. The power distribution energized, the ground is removed
when a BA-386/PRC-25 is used is similar from contact 2 of K3 and applied
except that a shorting cap is installed on to contact 3 of K3 to allow the audio
J3 and the BA-386/PRC-25 is connected to output of module A25 to be applied
J4 (fig. 88). to the handset. Relay K3 is ener-
b. Receive (fig. 86). When function gized by the squelch relay driver
switch S1 is at ON, and the handset push- stage (Q5) in module A24.
to-talk button is not depressed, the RT - c. Transmit (fig. 87). When function
505/PRC-25 will receive. The input volt- switch S1 is at ON and the handset push-
age from the primary power source is to-talk switch is pressed, the transmitter
applied through connector J3. circuits are activated. When the push-to-
(1) The input voltage from connector talk button is pressed, the control circuits
J3E (+12.5 volts) is connected to of relays K1 and K2 are completed.
contact 2 of S1 (rear). The +12.5 (1) The input voltage from connector
volts is applied through contacts of J3E (+12.5 volts) is applied,
switch S1 (rear) and connector through contacts 8 and 3 of relay
A16J1C to the input of module A16. K2, to dc-to-dc converter module
Regulated +10 volts from module Al. Module Al has two dc output
A16 is applied through connector voltages, +125 and -45, which are
A16J1F and the individual module used only for transmission. The
connectors to modules A14 and A15 +12 5-volt output (from A1J1B) is
through A16J1A to modules A9, applied to the plate circuit of the
A10, A11, A17, A18, and A25. Test transmitter power amplifier
switches S2 and S3 are in series through terminal 2 of assembly
with the voltages supplied to mod- A29. The -45-volt bias (from
ule Al0. Regulated +10 volts is A1J1F) is applied directly to the
supplied from module A18 through control grid circuit of assembly
contacts C of J14 and D of J18 to A29 and to module A6; it is also
module A12. Regulated +10 volts applied to module A7 through choke
is also applied from J11A through L1.
filter L2 (in A30), contacts 4 and (2) Filament voltage for transmitter
6 of transmit-receive relay K1, power amplifier V1 is applied from
and choke L4 to module A5; from the input connector J3-H through
contact 6 of K1 to module A21, and contacts 4 and 7 of relay K2 toter-
from contact 6 of K1 through choke minal 4 of assembly A29.
L3 to module A3. Relay K1 opens (3) The input voltage to A16 is applied
these circuits during transmis- from connector J3-E through func-
sion. When function switch S1 is at tion switch S1 to input connector
SQUELCH, regulated +10 volts is A16J1-C. The regulated +10-volt
applied from J11A through contacts output of A16 is coupled from J11A
4 and 3 of S1 (front) to module A24. through inductor L2 (in A30) to con-
This circuit is opened when switch tact 4 of relay K1. With relay K1
S1 is at positions other than energized (on transmit), the regu-
SQUELCH. lated +10 volts is transferred to
(2) When at SQUELCH, a ground is contact 7 of K1 and is applied
connected through contacts 8 and through inductor L4 to modules A8,
10 of switch S1 (front) and through A10, A20, A22, and A23. The regu-
contacts 8 and 2 of deenergized lated +10 volts ts is applied from
relay K3 to terminal 9 of mother module A16 through J11A direct to
board A27. This condition grounds modules A9, A10, A17, and A18 and
the output of module A25, which from J11F to modules A14 and A15
prevents audio signals from being when both on transmission and re-
applied to the handset. When K3 is ception.
41
CHAPTER 3
THIRD ECHELON MAINTENANCE
Section I. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING TECHNIQUES

Warning: Be extremely careful when servicing the RT-505/PRC-25. During opera-
tion, 125 volts dc exists at the plate circuit of the power amplifier.
34. Scope of Third Echelon Maintenance c. Localization and Isolation. The pro-
cedures given in (1) through (3) below will
Third echelon maintenance procedures
aid in localizing and isolating the trouble.
(para 35 through 45) supplement the main-
Localize the trouble to an area, and then
tenance procedures described in TM 11- isolate the trouble to a defective part. Use
5820-398-10 and TM 11-5820-398-20.
the following methods:
Third echelon maintenance includes sys-
tematic troubleshooting procedures (para (1) Troubleshooting chart. The trou-
35 through 39), repair procedures (para ble symptoms listed in the trouble-
40 through 42), and instructions for align- shooting chart (para 38) will aid in
ing power amplifier tank module A2, vari- localizing and isolating trouble to
able frequency oscillator module A9, and a part or to an assembly.
sidestep oscillator module A20 (para 43 (2) Voltage and resistance measure-
through 45). ments. Most troubles must be lo-
cated by voltage and resistance
35.Organization of Third Echelon Trouble- measurements. The RT-505/PRC-
shooting Procedures 25 is transistorized. Observe the
following precautions to prevent
a. General. The first step in trouble- transistor damage. Make voltage
shooting a defective RT-505/PRC-25 is to and resistance measurements only
sectional ize the fault to a major area such as specified. When measuring
as the power supply, function switch cir- voltages, use tape or sleeving to
cuits, or case wiring. The second step is insulate the entire test probe, ex-
to localize the fault to a defective assembly cept the extreme tip. A momentary
or area. The third step is to isolate the short circuit can ruin a transistor.
faulty part or circuit board within an as- (For example, if the bias is shorted
sembly. out, excessive current between the
b. Sectionalization. The following group emitter and the base may ruin the
of tests is arranged to reduce unnecessary transistor.)
work and to aid in troubleshooting a de- (3) Intermittent troubles. The possi-
fective RT-505/PRC-25. Sectionalize the bility of intermittent troub1es
trouble to faulty units by following the pro- should not be overlooked. If pre-
cedures listed in (1) and (2) below: sent, this type of trouble may often
(1) Visual inspection. Visual inspec-
be made to appear by tapping or
tion may locate faults without test- jarring the RT-505/PRC-25. Check
ing or measuring the circuits.
the wiring, the connections, and the
(2) Operational tests. O p e r a t i o n a l
plugs and jacks of the various mod-
tests frequently indicate the gen-
ules.
eral location of a trouble. In many
instances, operational tests, such
36. Test Equipment and Additional Equipment
as the equipment performance
Required
checklist (TM 11-5820-398-20),
will help in determining the exact The following charts list the equipment
nature of the fault. required for troubleshooting the RT-505/
42
PRC-25. The charts also list the associ-
Equipment
ated technical manuals for the equipment. Technioal manual
a. Test Equipment. Battery, Dry BA-386/ TM 11-5820-398-10

PRC-25.
‘hat equipment Technical manual Module extenders -------- (fig. 27)
(fig. 28)
‘l#~~& cover for mod-
Multimeter ME-26 B/U --- TM 11-6625-200-12 .
R;3tV#meter AN/URM- TM 11-5133 Dummy antenna, cons i sting (fig. 41)
of :a
S~&$;~ratar AN/ TM 11-1257 Connector, UG-447/U
(two required).
Frequency Meter AN/ TM 11-5057 Resistor, fixed, 510
USM-26. ohms, 1 watt.
RF Millivoltmeter 411A Resistor, fixed, 56
ohms, 1 watt (two
aIf specific models are not available, other models of tbe same required).
nomenclature having eimilar oharacteris tics may be used.
Wire, stranded, AWG
No. 18.
b. Additional Equipment Required. Aluminum can 6 in. x
2.5 in. x 2.5 in.
Technical manual Cord CG-530/U, p/o Fre- TM 11-5057
quency Meter AN/USM-
26.
Antenna AT-892 /PRC-25 -- TM 11-5820-398-10
Harxket H-138/U --------- TM 11-5820-398-10 aMust be fabricated by maintenance personnel (fig. 27, 28, and 4 1).
Figure 27. Typical module extender for module A20.
43
Figure 28. Typical alignment cover for
module A20.
Section II. THIRD ECHELON TROUBLESHOOTING
Caution: Do not attempt removal or replacement of parts before reading the instruc-
tions in paragraph 40.
37. Test Setup

a. Preparatory Steps. Prepare the RT-
505/PRC-25 for bench testing as follows: Control Position or indication
(1) Remove Battery Box CY-2562/

PRC-25 and Battery, Dry BA-386/ BAND SWITCH a ------- C or D
RF TUNING control s --- 45.00 or 64.00
PRC-25 (TM 11-5820-398-10 (para DEVIATION RANGE 25
28)). switch.
(2) Remove the receiver-transmitter OPERATION switch ---- 1000
DEVIATION LEVEL Adjust for 10 kc on
case (TM 11-5820-398-20 (para control. KILOCYCLES DEVIA-
8)). TION meter.
(3) Be sure the POWER receptacle RF SET TO LINE Adjust for MICROVOLTS
control. meter indication at RF
cover is on the POWER receptacle. SET TO LINE.
The POWER receptacle cover con- RF ATTENUATOR MI- Adjust for 0.70 microvolt
tains jumpers necessary for bat- CROVOLTS control. on right-hand meter,
tery operation. ‘The setting of the BAND SWITCH and the RF TUNING control
will be determined by the RT-505/PRC-25 operating frequency.
(4) Connect the BA-386/PRC-25 to the
battery plug on the RT-505/PRC- (b) Connect the AN/URM-48 RF ca-
25. ble to one end of the dummy an-
b. Test Equipment. tenna.
(1) Receiver section. (c) Connect the other end of the
(a) Use the AN/URM-48 to provide a dummy antenna to the receiver-
test signal. Set the controls on the transmitter ANT connector; use
AN/URM-48 as follows: cord CG-530/U.
44
(d) Connect Handset H-138/U to one (d) S e t t h e r e c e i v e r - t r a n s m i t t e r
of the receiver-transmitter AU- controls as follows:
DIO connectors.
Position or
(e) S e t t h e r e c e i v e r - t r a n s m i t t e r Control indication
controls as follows:
Function switch -------------- OFF
Position or BAND switch ---------------- 30-53
Control
indicaticm Tuning controls -------------- 45.00
VOLUME control ------------- 5
Function switch -------------- OFF
BAND switch ---------------- 30-53
Tuning controls -------------- 45.00
VOLUME control ------------- 5
38. Localizing and Isolating Troubles
(f) Use Multimeter ME-26 B/U to a. Test Conditions. Perform all checks
make the voltage and resistance outlined in the troubleshooting chart with
checks directed in the trouble- the equipment under test connected to the
shooting chart (para 38). BA-386/PRC-25 and to the additional
(2) Transmitter section. equipment as specified in paragraph 37.
(a) Use RF Wattmeter AN/URM-43A Disconnect the BA-386/PRC-25 when mak-
to provide antenna loading for the ing resistance checks.
transmitter. Set the 15W-60W b. Test Procedure. Turn the test equip-
switch on the AN/URM-43A at ment on and allow for a 5-minute warmup.
15W. Set the function switch of the RT-505/PRC-
(b) Connect the AN/URM-43A to the 25 at ON.
receiver-transmitter ANT con- Note: For removal and replacement of modules,
nector. refer to TM 11-5820-398-20, paragraph 10.
(c) Connect Handset H-138/U to one c. Troubleshooting Charts.
of the receiver-transmitter AU- (1) Troubleshooting chart for receiver
DIO connectors. section of R T-505/PRC-25.
Item Indication Probable trouble Procedure
1 UIC-TRANS FREQUENCY channel a. Connector J3 or J4 defective -- !. Check J3 and J4 (fig. 31 and 32)
dial lamp does not light when the for bent, broken, or missing
function switch is at IJTE. pins.
b. Switch S2 defective ---------- 5. Check wiring between switch S1,
term~~
.-, 7, ~d xDS1 [fig. 29
and 88). Check wiring be-sveen
terminals 6 and 5 of S1. Check
continuity from S1, terminal 8,
to ground (fig. 88).
2 No 1, 000-cps out~t signal from a. Open circuit between A16 and ~. Check physical condition of Jll.
the AN/URM-48 is heard in the A27. Check printed wiring of A27
H-138/U when the function switd (fig. 34 and 88) by visual
is at ON. inspection and continuity
measurements. Check conti-
nuity between pin A of Jll and
pin 11 of A27, and between pin
D of Jll and pin 4 of A27 (fig.
;8).
b. Open circuit between A16 and 5. Check continuity between pin C
J4. of Jll and pill B uf J4 (fig.
68) .
c. Open circuit between A25J2 >. Check continuity between pins 1,
and A27. 2, and 3 of A25J2 and @llS 11,
10, and 9, respectively, of
A27 terminal strip (fig. 88).
d. Open circuit between A27 and 1. Check continuity between pins 9
FL1 or FL2. and 10 of A27 terminal strip,
and pins B ad A, respectively,
of FL1 and FL2 (fig. 88).
45
e. Defective relay K3 or relay ?. Check continuity between termi-

socket XK3 . nals 2 and 8 of relay K3 (nor-
mal indication is O ohm).
Check continuity between ter-
minals 3 and 8 of relay X3
(normal indication is infinity).
Check physioal condition of
XK3 (fig. 33 and 88).
f. Defective wiring between XK3 f. Cheek continuity between pin 2
and A2’7. of XK3 and pin 9 of A27 ter-
minal strip (fig. 32 and 88).
g. Defective capacitor A27C1O or ;. Check resistance of A27C1O and
A27C11. A27C11 (fig. 88). (Should indi-
cate several megohms. )
3 Received signals are not heard, a. Defective A28S2 or A28S3 ---- I. Check physical condition of
but a rushing noise is heard fn A28S2 and A28S3. Check con-
the H-138/U when the function tinuity through A28 S2 and
switch is at ON and the long A28S3, with long antenna
antenna is fnstalled at ANT installed (fig. 16 and 31).
connector J1. Received sig- b. Defective A28S1 or A38L4 --- I. Change bands and retest. If
nals are normal with the short signal is received on the high
antenna installed. band but not on the low, turn
S1 to the low-baud position and
check continuity between pins 1
and 2 of A28 (fig. 34 and 88).
If resistance is infinity, check
continuity of A28L4 and between
pins 8 and 9 of A38S1. Check
continuity between J1 and pin
1 of A28 (fig. 88). If resist-
ance is high, check continuity
between terminals 5 and 6 of
A28S1. Check C2A, on main
frame (fig. 34 and 88).
c. Defective A28S1, A281.A, or :. K sigmd is received on a low
A28C2. band but not on the high, turn
S1 to high-bsnd position and
check continuity between A28S1,
terminal 10 and A38, terminal
1. Check A28L1 and A28C2
(fig. 16).
4 Received signals are not heard, a. Defective A28S1 or A28L3 --- L Change bands and retest. M
but a rushing noise is heard in signal is received on high band
the H-138/U when the function but not on low, turn S1 to the
switch is at ON and the short low-band position and check
antenna is installed at ANT continuity between J1 and
connector J1. Received signals A28S1, terminal 11. Check
are normal with the long an- A28L3 and A28C3 (fig. 16).
tenna installed. b. Defective A28S1 or A28L2 --- !I. If signal is received on the low
band but not on the high, turn
S1 to the high-band position
and check continuity between
J1 and A28S1, terminal 1 (fig.
88). Check A28L2 (fig. 16).
c. Defective A28C1 ------------ $. If signal is not received on either
band (with short antenna) but
is normal with long antenna,
check A28C1 (fig. 16).
5 When signals from the AN/URM- Defective BAND switch shaft ---- Higher echelon maintenance re-
48 are applied, one band oper- quired.
ates properly but on the other
band, a rushing noise is heard
in the H-138/U when the furtc-
tion switch is at ON.
6 When s@als from the AN/URM- a. Defective relay K1 ---------- ~. Check continuity between ter-
48 are applied, a rushing noise minals 4 and 6 of K1 (normal
is heard in the H-138/U on indication is O ohm). Check
46
either band when the hmction continuity between contacts 3

switch is at ON. Transmit and 8 of K1 (fig. 88). (Normal
operation is normal. indication is infinity. )
b. Be fective A30L2 ------------- ,. Check continuity between termi-
nals 2 and ‘7 of A30L2 (fig. 88).
c. Defective wiring in the regu- ,. Connect the common lead of the
lated +10-vol~line to A3_, ME-26 B/U to pill A of Jll and
A4, A5, or A21. successively check continuity
to the following pdnts: pin 1
of A27; pins land 30f J7; and
pin G of J9. If the indication
obtained at pin 3 of J7 is in-
finity, check L3. If the indi-
cation obtained at pin G of J9
is infinity, check L4. Check
the physical condition of J1
and J9 (fig. 88).
d. Defective wiring between A2 L Check continuity between pin 9 of
and A3 . J8 and pin 8 of J8. Check
physical condition of J8 (fig.
31 and 88).
e. Defective wiring between A3 !. Check continuity between pin 5
and A4. andpin40f J8, andpin6 and
3 of J8 (fig. 31 and 88).
f. Defective wiring between A4 f. Check continuity between Din 1
and A5. of J8 and pin “B of J9; aid be-
tween pin 2 of J8 and pin A of
J9 (fig. 31 and 88).
L?. Defective wiring between A9 $. Check continui~ between pin 4
and A5. of J5 and pin H of J9 (fig. 31
and 88). If the indication is in-
finity, check R1. Recheck
wiring.
h. Defective wiring between A5 L Check continuity between pin C of
and 11. 5-me filter FL3. J9 and IN terminal of FL3 (fig.
31, 32, and 88).
i. Defective 110 5-me fflter FL3- i. Examine external filter wiring for
breaka or other signs of de-
terioration. Check FL3 by sub-
stitution (fig. 32 and 88).
J Defective wiring between FL3 j. Check continuity between OUT
and A21. t8rminal of FL3 and pin 2 of
connector A21J1 (fig. 33 and
88).
k. Defective wiring between A21 k. Check continuity between pin 3
and 11. 5-me discriminator of A21J2 and IN terminal of
Z1 . Z1 (fig. 33 and 88).
1. Defective 11. 5-me discrimi- 1. Examine external filter wiring
nator Z1. for breaks or other signs of
deterioration. Check Z1 by
substitution (fig. 33 and 88).
m. Defective wiring between Z1 n. Check continuity between OUT
and A25. terminal of Z1 and pin 1 of
A25J1 (fig. 33 and 88).
n. Defective wiring between A25 n. Check continuity between center
and RI (VOLUME control). tap of R1 and pbl 3 of A25J1.
Check continuiw between pin
4 of A27 and pin 4 of A25J1
(fig. 33 and 88).
7 A rush noise is heard in the a. Defective regulated +10-volt a. Check continuity between pin A
H-138?U when the function switc wiring to A9. of Jll and Din 2 of J5 .-(fig. 31
is at ON, when either antenna and 88). -
is ueed on either band. The b. Defective Cl or C2 --------- b. Check physical condition of Cl
transmitter is also inoperative. and C2. Higher echelon repair
required (fig. 34 and 88).
8 When a signal is not behg re- a. Defective relay K3 ---------- a. Check continuity between con-
ceived, a rushing noise is heard tacts 8 and 3 of relay K3 (fig.
47
Item indication Probable trouble Procedure
in the H-138/U with. the iimction 32 and 88). (Normal indication

switch at SQUELCH. ia infinity, with nc signal
input. )
5. Defective A24J2 ------------- I. Check phyeical ccnditicn of A24J2.
Remove relay X3 from XK3 and
check oontinutty between pin 3
of A24J2 (fig. 33 ad 88) and
ground. (Normal indication is
infintty. )
9 b output ia heard in the H-138/U a. Defective S1 ----------------- I. Check continui~ between pine 8
when the function switch ia at and 10 of S1 and between pine
SQUELCH in either the receim 3 and 4 of S1 (fig. 88).
or tranamit mcde of operation. >. Defective wiring between S1 I. Check continuity between pin 10
and x3. of S1 and phl 8 of XK3. Check
continuity between pin 4 of S1
and pti 1 of XK3 (fig. 33 and
88).
2. Defective wiring between S1 . Check continuiw between pin 4 of
and A24. S1 and pin 1 of A24J2 (fig. 33
and 88).
1. Defective wiring between A24 !. Check ccntinutty between pin 3 of
and K3. A24J2 and pin 5 of relay sccket
XK3 (fig. 33 and 88).
9. Defective relay K3 ----------- I. Check relay K3 by substitution.
10 To output ie heard in the H-138/U Defective wiring between A25 and ‘heck continuity between pin 4 of
when tlw function switch is at A24. A25J1 and pti 1 of A24J1 (fig. 33
SQUELCH with a proper (150- lmd 88).
CPS modulated) signal being re-
ceived.
11 No out@ is heard in the H-138/U a. Defective wiring between A23 ~. Check continui~ between pin 1
during transmit operation when and A24. of A23J1 and pin 4 of A24J1
the function switch is at (fig. 33 and 88).
SQUELCH. Output is normal b. Defective wiring between A27 5. Check continuity between pin 14
during receive operation. and A23. of A27 and pin 2 of A23J2 (fig.
33 and 88).
12 Receives and transmits signal on a. Defective regulated +10-volt ~. Check continuity between the
the wrong channel. wiring to fee modules. following points:
(1) Pin A of Jll and pin D of
J1’7.
(2) Pin A of Jll and pin A of
J13.
(3) Pin A of Jll and pin C of
J14.
(4) Pin A of Jll and pill 2 of
(5) Pi~k of Jll and pill G of

J12.
(6) Pin A of Jll and pin 11 of
J12.
(7) Pin F of Jll and pin B of
J20.
(8) Pin F of Jll and pin A cf
J21.
(9) Pin D of J14 and pin D of
J18 (fig. 31 and 88).
E the measurement between
pin A of Jll and pin G or
H of J12 is infinity, check
S2 and S3.
b. Defective wiring between A9 5. Check continuity between pin 1
and A14. of J6 and pin A of J20 (fig. 31
and 88). Check printed wiring
of A26 (fig. 34). Check physi-
cal condition of J6 and J20.
c. Defective wiring IxMveen A14 x Check continui~ between pin E
and A13. of J20 and pill F of J19, and
between pin D of J20 and pin
48
E of J19. Ch6ck physical con-

dition of J19 (fig. 31 and 88).
d. Defective wiring between A15 d. Check continuity between pin E
and A14. of J21 and pin F of J20. Check
31 and 88).
e. Defective wiring between A13 e. Check continuity between pin J
and A1O. of J12 and pti D of J19”. Check
31 and 88).
f. Defective wiring between A13 f. Check continuity between pin B
and A12. of J19 and pill B of J18, and
between pin A ,of J19 and pin
A of J18. Check physical con-
dition of J18 (fig. 31 and 88).
&!. Defective wiring between A12 g. Check continuity between pin F
and A18. of J18 and pin F of J14. Check
31 and 88).
h. Defective wiring between A18 h. Check continuity between pin A
and All. of J14 and pin F of J17. Check
31 and 88).
i. Defective wiring between A18 i. Check continuity between pin A
and A17. of J14 and pin B of J13. Check
31 and 88).
J Defective wiring between A1O j. Check continuity between pin B
and A17. of J12 and pill E of J13, and
between pin A of J12 and pin D
of J13 (fig. 31 and 88).
k. Defective wiring between A17 k. Check continuity between pin F
and All. of J13 and pin B of J17 (fig. 31
and 88).
1. Defective wiring between All 1. Check continuity between pin A
and A9 . of J17 and pin 2 of J6 (fig. 31
and 88).
n. Capacitor C8 defective ------- n. Check leakage resistance of C8
with A9 and All removed.
(Leakage resistance should be
several megohms. )
13 Receives signal on the wrong Defective wiring to diode switch- Check continuity-between pin M of
channel. Transmit operation ing network in A1O. J3 and pin C of J12. Check con-
is normal. tinuity between pin 7 of A30 and
pill E of J12 (fig. 31 and 88).
14 High-frequency noise in the audio FL1 or FL2 defective ---------- Replace FL1 or FL2 (fig. 34).
output.
15 Tuning knobs do not function 8elector mechanism defective --- Higher echelon repair required.
properly.
(2) Troubleshooting chart for transmitter section of RT-505/PRC-25.

Mm Indication Probable trouble Procedure
1 Low rf power output indicated on a. Low dc voltage applied to A29v1 a. Check dc voltage in~t to A29
the AN/URM-43A. (para 39).
b. Improper antenna loading ----- b. Perform the procedures in item
3 or 4 of (1) above, as appli-
cable.
c. Improper alignment of Cl ----- c. Higher echelon maintenance
required.
2 Norf power out~t indicated on the Defective BAND switch shaft ----- Higher ‘whelon maintenance
AN/URM-43A on one baud. Re- required.
ceiver also defective on the same
balNL
49
3 o rf Power output indicated on the i. Defeotive C 1 ---------------- R. Higher echelon maintenance

AN/URM-43A on one band. Re- required.
ceiver operation ia normal on >. Defeotive S4, or wiring from S4 b. Check S4 and COIltiIIUity of
both bands. to A26 assembly. wiring between S4 and A26.
Check printed wiring of A26
(fig. 34 and 66).
>. Defeotive wiring between A19 c. Cheek continuity between pin
and A20. D of J15 and pin B of J16
(for low band), ad between
pin F of J15 and pin B of J16
(for high band). Cheek physical
condition of J15 and J16 (fig.
31 and 68).
4 o rf power output indicated on the i. Defeotive FL1 or FL2 -------- R. Conneot the handset to AUDIO
AN/URM-43A on either band. R& conneotor FL1, press the
ceive operation is normal. H-138/U push-to-talk switch.
Repeat the procedure with
the H-138/U connected to
FL2. If the transmitter oper-
ates properly from one AUDIO
cormeotor, but not the other,
replace the defective connector
(pars 47).
). Defeotive A30L2 ------------ b. Cheek continuity between pine 2
and 7 of A30. Replace A30L2
if indication is infinity (fig. 68).
>. Defeotive relay K1 ------—-- c. Key the transmitter and check
the voltage between contacts
4 and 7 of K1. Zero volt should
be obtained, indicating closed
(energized) contaots.
i. Defeotive indicator A30L4 ---- d. Check continuity between pine 4
and 9 of A30. Replace A30L4
if indication is infinity (fig. 86).
?. Defective capacitor A30C 1 ---- & Check A30C 1 by substitution (fig.
88).
f. Defeotive relay K2 ---------- f. With handeet keyed, cheek volt-
age across contacts 6 and 3
and acrose contacts 4 and 7 of
K2. Ia each case, O volt should
be measured, indicating closed
(energized) relay contacts.
;. Defective +12. 5-volt distribu- E!. Check continuity between contaot
tion wiring. 3 of K2 and pin C (fig. 34 and
68) of J1O. Check physical
condition of J1O (fig. 31 and 88).
~. Defeotive +2. 5-volt distribu- h Check continuity between contact
tion wiring. 7 of K2 and pin 4 (fig. 34) of
A29 (fig. 88).
i. Defective -45-volt distribution i. Check continuity between pin F
wiring. of J1O and the following points:
(1) Pin 7 of A29.
(2) Pin 15 of J6.
(3) Pin 8 of J5.
Replace L1 if the measurements
between pin F of J1O and pin
8 of J5 indicate infinity. Check
physical condition of J5 and
J6 (fig. 31 and 66),
j. Defective +125-volt distribution j. Check continuity between pin B
wiring. of J1O (fig. 31) and pin 2 of
A29 (fig. 88).
k. Defective +10-volt regulated k, Check continuity between pin 9
distribution wiring. of A30 and pins 5 and 6 of J5,
and pin C of J16. Replace L2
if measurement between pin
9 of A30 and pin 6 of J5 in-
50
dicates infinity. Check physical

condition of J16 (fig. 31 and 88).
1. Defective wiring between A26 1. Check continuity between pin 6 of
and A20. A26 and pin B of J16. Check
31 and 88).
n. Defective wiring between A20 n. Check continuity between pin F
and A9. of J16 and pin 1 of J5. Check
physical condition of J5.
n. Defective wiring between A9 ant n. Check continuity between pine
A8. 4 and 5 of J6 (fig. 31 and 88).
o. Defective wiring between A8 anc o. Check continuity between pina
A’7. 8 and 9 of J6, and between
pina 7 and 10 of J6 (fig. 31
and 88).
p. Defective wiring between AT anc p. Check continuity between pins
A6. 11 and 14 of J6, and piM 12
and 13 of J6 (fig. 31 and 88).
q. Defective wiring between A6 anc q. Check continuity between pin 10
A29. of J5 (fig. 31) and pill 6 of
A29 (fig. 88).
r. Defective C3 and C4 ---.----- r. Check C3 and C4 by substitution
(fig. 88).
s. Defective components in A29 -- s. Perform voltage and resistance
measurements for A29 (pars
39) to determine the faulty
component.
5 ?ranamits and receives signals on Defective fss circuitry ---------- Perform the procedures outlined
wrong channel on either band. in item 12 of (1) above.
6 ?ranamits signal on wrong channel Defective S4, or wiring from S4 Check S4. Check continuity be-
on either band.” Receiver oper- to A26. Defective wiring from tween S4 and A26. Check con-
ation is normal. A26 to A20. tinuity between pin 6 of A26 and
pin B of J16 (fig. 31 and 88).
7 Yanarnits signal on wrong channel a. Defective wiring to diode a. Check continuity between pin
on one band. switching in A1O. 17 of A26 and pin D of J12
(fig. 31 and 88).
b. Defective wiring between A19 b. Check continuity between pin
and A20. D of J15 and pin B of J16
for the low band, and between
pin F of J15 and pin B of J16
for the high band (fig. 31 and
88).
8 rranemits a continuous-wave (CW) Defective wiring between A22 and Check continuity between pin 1 of
carrier but sidetone is heard in A20. A22J2 (fig. 33) and pin A of J16
H-138/U. (fig. 33 and 88).
9 rranamits a cw carrier but no a. Defective FL1 or FL2. Defec- a. Check physical condition of FL1
sidetone is heard in H-138/U tive wiring from FL1 or FL2 and FL2 (fig. 34 and 88). Check
when the function switch is at ON, to A22. continuity between pine D of
FL1 and FL2 and pin 4 of A22J1
(fig. 33 and 88). Check physical
condition of A27 printed wiring
(fig. 34 and 88).
b. Defective +10-volt regulated b. Check continuity between pin 9
wiring to A22. of A30 and pin 2 of A22J2 (fig.
33 and 88).
10 hanamits a modulated carrier but
no sidetone is heard in H-138/U Defective wiring between A22 and Check continuity between pin 2 of
when the function switch is at ON A25. A22J1 and pin 4 of A25J2 (fig.
33 and 88).
11 rranamits a modulated carrier but Defective squelch circuitry ----- Perform the procedures outlined
no sidetone is heard in the H- in item 9 of (1) ahove.
138/U in either the transmit or
receive mode of operation when
the function switch is at
SQUELCH.
12 IYanamits a modulated carrier Defective wiring between A23 and Check continuity between pin 1 of
but no sidetone is heard in the H- A24. A23J1 and pin 4 of A24J1 (fig.
138/U when the function switch 33 and 88).
51
is at SQUELCH. Receiver oper-

ation is normal.
13 Transmits a modulated carrier Defective wiring between A23 and Check continuity between pin 1
that cannot be received when an A22. A23J2 and pin 4 of A22J2 (fig.
RT-505/PRC-25 at the receiving 33 and 88).
site is in the SQUELCH mode of
operation, Sidetone is heard in
H-138/U.
14 Same as step 13 except no sidetone Defective +10-volt regulated wir- Check continuity between pin 9
is heard in H-138/U. ing to A23. of A30 and pin 2 of A23J2 (fig.
33 and 88).
15 BAND switch does not function BAND switch defective --------- Higher echelon maintenance
properly. required.
16 Tuning knobs do not function Selector mechanism defective -- Higher echelon maintenance
properly. required.
39. Isolating Trouble in Transmitter Power (9) Repeat (6) and (7) above.
Amplifier Circuit (10) If the output does not meet the
(fig. 14 and 29) standards outlined in (1) and (6)
above, proceed to c below.
a. Preparation.
(1) Prepare the following equipment: c. Faulty Parts Is elation.
(1) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT
(a) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
connector J2. Connect the H-138/U
(b) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A.
to an AUDIO connector.
(c) Handset H-138/U.
(2) Set the BAND switch at 30-52 and
(2) Set the front panel controls of the
set the tuning controls for 30.00
receiver-transmitter as follows:
mc.
(a) BAND switch at 30-52.
(3) Press the H-138/U push-to-talk
(b) Tuning controls for 30.00 mc.
switch and measure the voltages
(c) Function switch at ON.
(3) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT at the points listed in the chart
connector J2. below. Compare them with the nor-
(4) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO mal signal and dc voltages listed.
Note: Measure all voltages to ground.
connector.
b. Output Power Test. (a) Signal voltage chart.
(1) Press the H-138/U push-to-talk
switch. The AN/URM-43A should Point of measurement Voltage (rnu3)
indicate 2 watts.
(2) Release the H-138/U push-to-talk A29-5 --------------------- 16
A29V1-8 ------------------- 16
switch. A29V1-3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 68
(3) Set the receiver-transmitter tun-
ing controls for 52.95 mc. (b) Dc voltage chart.
(4) Repeat (1) and (2) above.
Point of measurement
A29-2 ---------------------
I Voltage (dc )
+125
(a) BAND switch at 53-75. A29-7 --------------------- -45
(b) Tuning controls for 53.00 mc. A29-4 --------------------- +2.5
(6) “Press the H-138/U push-to-talk A29V1-5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +2. 5
A29V1-7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +2. 5
switch. The AN/URM-43A should A29V1-3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +118
indicate 1.5 watts. A29-5 --------------------- -10.2
A29V1-8 ------------------- -10.2
(7) Release the H-138/U push-to-talk
switch. (4) After the replacement of a faulty
(8) Set the receiver-transmitter tun- part, perform the procedures given
ing controls for 75.95 mc. in a and b above.
52
Figure 29. Transmitter power amplifier test points and parts location.
Section III. THIRD ECHELON REPAIRS

40. Scope of Third Echelon Repairs and all other components within the RT-
505/PRC-25.
a. The third echelon repairman may re- b. Paragraphs 41 and 42 contain instruc-
move and replace audio and control chassis tions for removing and replacing parts of
A27, the synthesizer mother board A26, the RT-505/PRC-25.
53
41. Removal and Replacement of Audio control chassis A27 terminal strip.
and Control Chassis A27 (5) Replace 11.5-mc filter FL3 and
(fig. 32) solder the connections.
(6) Replace receiver discriminator Z1
a. Removal. and solder the connections.
(1) Remove modules A21 through A25
(7) Replace relay K3 into socket XK3.
as described in TM 11-5820-398-
(8) Replace modules A21 through A25
20, paragraph 10a. as described in TM 11-5820-398-
(2) Remove relay K3.
20, paragraph 10b.
(3) Unsolder and remove 11.5-mc fil-
(9) Secure audio and control chassis
ter FL3.
A27 with the three audio and con-
(4) Unsolder and remove receiver dis-
trol chassis captive screws.
criminator Z1.
(5) Tag and unsolder all wiring to relay 42. Removal and Replacement of Synthesizer
socket XK3 and audio and control
Mother Board A26
chassis A27 terminal strip.
(6) Rem o v e the wiring through the (fig. 34)
grommet at the lower left corner of a. Removal.
the audio and control chassis. (1) Remove modules A10 through A20
(7) Using a hacksaw, cut off one end of as described in TM 11-5820-398-
the metal dowel protruding from 20, paragraph 10c.
the audio and control chassis A27 (2) Remove the 10 module nuts and
hinge. bushings.
(8) Grasp the other end of the metal (3) Loosen the four mother board cap-
dowel with pliers and remove the tive fasteners.
metal dowel from the hinge. (4) Gently pull the mother board away
(9) Release the three audio and control from the chassis.
chassis captive screws and separ- (5) Tag and unsolder all wiring to the
ate audio and control chassis A27 mother board.
from the RT-505/PRC-25. b. Replacement.
b. Replacement. (1) Solder all electrical leads to the
(1) Align the hinge on audio and control mother board.
chassis A27 with the hinge on RT- (2) Align the four mother board captive
505/PRC-25. fasteners with the holes in the
(2) Insert a new metal dowel and push chassis.
downward until the dowel extends (3) Secure the mother board captive
through the entire hinge. fasteners.
(3) Crimp the metal dowel at both ends. (4) Replace and tighten the 10 module
(4) Insert the wiring through the grom- nuts and bushings.
met at the lower left corner of the (5) Replace modules AlO through A20
audio and control chassis A27 (fig. as described in TM 11-5820-398-
33) and solder all the electrical 20, paragraph 10d.
leads to XK3 and to the audio and
Figure 30. Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25, bottom view.
55
Figure 31. Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25, bottom view, modules r e m o v e d .
56
Figure 32. Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25, top view.
57
TM 5820-398-35-31
Figure 33. Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25, top view, modules removed.
58
Figure 34. Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25, top view, audio and control chassis A27 open.
Section IV. THIRD ECHELON ALIGNMENT
Note: Third echelon alignment consists of aligning transmitter power amplifierTank module A2, variable
frequency oscillator module A9, and sidestep oscillator module A20.
43. Alignment of Power Amplifier

of one of the receiver-transmitter AUDIO
Tank Module A2
connectors.
(fig. 30 and 31)
e. Adjust A2T1 for a maximum indica-
a. Set the rf output of the AN/URM-48 tion on the ME-26B/U.
for 30.00 mc, modulated ±10 kc by a 1,000 - f. Set the rf output of the AN/URM-48
cycle-per-second (cps) tone. for 52.95 mc, modulated ±10 kc by a 1,000-
b. Connect the RF output lead of the AN/ cps tone.
URM-48 to receiver-transmitter ANT jack g. Set the receiver-transmitter tuning
J2 . controls for 52.95 mc.
c. Set the BAND switch of the receiver- h. Adjust A2C1 for a maximum indica-
transmitter at 30-52, and the tuning con- tion on the ME-26B/U.
trols for 30.00 mc. i. Repeat c through h above until no
d. Adjust the ME-26B/U to measure ac further increase in the ME-26B/U meter
voltage and connect it across pins A and B indication can be obtained.
59
j. Set the rf output of the AN/URM-48 j. Repeat b through i above s e v e r a 1
for 53.00 mc, modulated ±10 kc by a 1,000- times to insure proper alignment of A9.
cps tone.
k. Set the BAND switch of the receiver- 45. Alignment of Sidestep Oscillator
transmitter at 53-75, and the tuning con- Module A20
trols for 53.00 mc. (fig. 30 and 31)
1. Adjust A2T2 for a maximum indica-
tion on the ME-26B/U. a. Remove module A20 (TM 11-5820-
398-20, para 10c).
m. Set the rf output of the AN/URM-48
b. Insert the module extender (fig. 27)
for 75.95 mc, modulated ±10 kc by a 1,000-
into J16.
cps tone.
c. Remove the cover from module A20
n. Set the receiver-transmitter tuning
and place the module cover (fig. 28) on the
controls for 75.95 mc.
module.
o. Adjust A2C2 for a maximum indica-
d. Connect module A20 to the module
tion on the ME-26B/U.
p. Repeat k through o above until no extender (fig. 27).
e. Set the receiver-transmitter BAND
further increase in the ME-26 B/U meter
switch at 30-52.
indication can be obtained.
f. Connect the AN/USM-26 between
44. Alignment of Variable Frequency A20J2 (top of module A20) and ground (fig.
30).
Oscillator Module A9
(fig. 30 and 31) g. Connect the AN/URM-43A to re-
ceiver-transmitter ANT connector J2.
a. Connect the AN/USM-26 between h. Connect an RF millivoltmeter 411A
A14J2 and ground. between A20J2 and ground (fig. 30).
b. Set the receiver-transmitter BAND i. Connect the H-138/U to a receiver-
switch to 30-52, and the tuning controls to transmitter AUDIO connector.
30.00 mc. j. Press the H-138/U push-to-talk
c. Press and hold S2 and S3. switch and adjust A20T1 for an indication
d. Adjust A9T1 until the AN/USM-26 of 11.451 mc ±500 cps on the AN/USM-26.
indicates a frequency of 41.500 mc. k. Adjust A20T2 for a maximum indica-
e. Release S2 and S3. tion on the 411A.
f. Set the receiver-transmitter tuning l. Remove module A20 and the module
controls to 52.95 mc. extender from J16.
g. Press and hold S2 and S3. m. Remove the module alignment cover
h. Adjust A9C9 until the AN/USM- from module A20.
26 indicates a frequency of 64.450 n. Replace the cover on module A20.
mc. o. Replace module A20 (TM 11-5820-
i. Release S2 and S3. 398-20, para 10d).
60
CHAPTER 4
FOURTH ECHELON MAINTENANCE
Section I. FOURTH ECHELON REPAIRS

46. Scope of Fourth Echelon Repairs shafts of tuning capacitors C1 and
C2.
Fourth echelon maintenance includes
(11) Remove the two screws that se-
those functions allocated to third echelon
cure the selector mechanism hous-
maintenance (ch 3). In addition, it also
ing assembly to the chassis.
includes removal and replacement of the
(12) Remove the six screws that se-
front panel and the selector mechanism
cure the front panel to the chassis
housing assembly, and alignment of tuning
(fig. 31).
capacitors C1 and C2.
(13) Remove the nuts (fig. 37) on the
front panel that secure the AUDIO
47. Removal and Replacement of Front Panel
connectors in place.
a. Removal. (14) Remove the POWER connector nut
(1) Remove modules A2, A6, A 10, and (fig. 37).
A16. (15) Remove the VOLUME control re-
(2) Remove the Allen head screw that taining screw and the VOLUME
secures the module band position- control knob (fig. 37). A retaining
ing arm to the yoke assembly (fig. nut, and a lockwasher are under
35). the knob; remove them.
(3) Remove the lamp receptacle screw (16) Remove the function switch retain-
and its lockwasher and flatwasher ing screw and the function switch
(fig. 35). Remove the lamp recep- knob. A retaining nut is under the
tacle and the lamp. knob; remove it.
(4) Loosen the three audio and control (17) Gently pull the front panel awav .
chassis captive screws that secure from the chassis. -
the audio and control chassis, and Note: It may be necessary to loosen or
remove the three screws that secure the
swing the chassis away (fig. 36). antenna loading network (fig. 39) to the
(5) Unsolder and tag the wire con- front panel so that the POWER connector
nected to the contact on left side can be worked loose.
of tuning capacitor C2 (fig. 39). b. Replacement.
(6) Unsolder and tag the shield and (1) Secure the POWER and AUDIO con-
center conductor of the coaxial nectors in their respective open-
cable connected to ANT connector ings on the front panel with the
(fig. 39). retaining nut.
(7) Remove the two clamps that secure Note: If necessary, tighten the three
screws that secure the antenna loading
the electrical leads to the selector network to the f r o n t panel after the
mechanism housing assembly (fig. POWER connector has been replaced.
36). (2) Replace the function switch shaft
(8) Remove the two screws that secure nut and knob.
the relay socket to the spacer legs (3) Replace the star washer, retaining
and remove the assembly (fig. 39). nut, knob, the VOLUME control,
(9) Remove the four screws that se- the lockwasher, nut, and knob.
cure the two tuning capacitors C1 (4) Replace the six screws that
and C2 to the selector mechanism secure the chassis to the front
housing assembly. panel.
(10) Loosen the clamps around the (5) Rep1ace the two screws that
61
secure the selector mechanism above to the contact on the left
housing assembly to the chassis. side of tuning capacitor C2.
(6) Replace tuning capacitors C1 and (11) Replace the lamp in the lamp re-
C2 and secure them with four ceptacle and s e cure it to the
screws. selector mechanism housing as-
Note: Do not tighten the clamp on the sembly with the flat washer, lock-
shaft of tuning capacitors C1 and C2 at
this time. washer, and screw.
(7) Replace the relay socket assembly (12) Place the module band position-
on the spacer legs and secure it ing arm into the yoke assembly
with screws. and secure with the Allen head
(8) Replace the clamps that secure the screw.
electrical leads to the selector (13) Replace modules A2, A6, A10, and
mechanism housing assembly. A16 (TM 11-5820-398-20, para 10).
(9) Solder the shield and center con- (14) Align tuning capacitors C1 and C2
ductor to ANT connector J2. (para 50 and 51).
(10) Solder the wire removed in a(5) (15) Close the audio and control chassis
Figure 35. Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25, bottom v i e w , d i s a s s e m b l y .
62
Figure 36. Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25, top view, audio and control c h a s s i s o p e n .
Figure 37. Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25, front panel, tuning knobs removed.
63
and secure it with the three audio lector mechanism housing assem-
a n d c o n t r o l c h a s s i s captive bly (fig. 38).
screws. (5) Remove the five selector mech-
anism securing screws that se-
48. Removal and Replacement of Selector cure the selector mechanism hous-
Mechanism ing assembly to the front panel.
(fig. 37, 38, and 40) (6) Separate the selector mechanism
housing assembly from the front
a. Removal.
panel by tapping the receiver-
(1) Remove the front panel (para 47).
transmitter tuning knobs gently.
(2) Remove the receiver-transmitter
b. Replacement.
tuning knobs as follows (fig. 40):
(1) Reassemble the selector mech-
Note: Removal of the mc and the kc tun- anism housing assembly and front
ing knob assemblies from their respective
shafts is identical. Removal of the kc panel.
stop assembly can be accomplished with- (2) Replace the five selector mech-
out disassembling the kc tuning knob as- anism securing screws that secure
sembly. Removal of the mc stop assembly
and plate mounting, however, requires the the selector mechanism housing
disassembly and removal of the entire mc assembly to the front panel.
tuning knob assembly. (3) Replace the dust seal.
(a) Remove the roll pin that retains (4) Replace the BAND switch knob to
the wingnut on the selector mech- the shaft and secure the knob with
anism shaft. the BAND switch retaining screw.
(b) Remove the wingnut, lockwasher, (5) Replace the receiver-transmitter
flat washer, and upper knob. tuning knobs as follows:
(c) Remove the tru-arc retaining (a) Replace, the stop assembly (PRE-
ring from the sleeve assembly SET mechanical lever) on the kc
and remove the retaining washer tuning knob shaft and secure it
and spring. to the front panel with two screws
(d) Remove the lower knob. and two washers.
(e) Remove the spring pin that se- (b) Replace the stop assembly and
cures the sleeve assembly to the plate mounting (PRESET mech-
selector mechanism shaft. anical lever) on the mc tuning
(f) Remove the sleeve assembly. knob shaft and secure with the
(g) Remove the stop assembly and four fillister head screws around
plate mounting (PRESET mech- the shaft.
anical lever) on the mc tuning (c) Replace the sleeve assembly.
knob shaft by removing the four (d) Replace the spring pin that se-
fillister head. screws around the cures the sleeve assembly to
shaft. the shaft.
(h) Remove the stop assembly (PRE- (e) Replace the lower knob.
SET mechanical lever) on the kc (f) Replace the spring, retaining
tuning knob shaft by removing the washer, and tru-arc retaining
two screws and two washers that ring.
secure it to the front panel. (g) Replace the upper knob.
(3) Remove the BAND switch retaining (h) Replace the flat washer, lock-
screw that secures the BAND washer, and wingnut.
switch knob (fig. 37) to the shaft (i) Replace the roll pin that retains
and remove the BAND switch knob. wingnut on shaft.
(4) Remove the dust seal from the se- (6) Replace front panel (para 47b).
64
Figure 38. Front panel, rear view.
Figure 39. Tuning capacitor assembly.

65
Figure 40. Tuning knob assembly.
Section II. FOURTH ECHELON ALIGNMENT
49. General trol settings unless specifically directed.

a. Remove module A8 from the chassis.
a. Scope of Fourth Eohelon Alignment b. Adjust the RT-505/PRC-25 tuning
Procedures. Fourth echelon alignment knobs for 30.00 mc and set the BAND
consists of aligning tuning capacitors C1 switch at 30-52.
and C2. These capacitors must be aligned
c. Use a Ballantine Direct Capacity
whenever the front panel is replaced, or
Meter Model 520, or equivalent. Connect
whenever tuning capacitor C1 or C2 is the ground lead of the 520 to the RT-
replaced. 505/PRC-25 chassis.
b. Equipment Required. A Ballan- d. Connect the other lead from the 520
tine Direct Capacity Meter Model 520 or to the stator section of tuning capacitor
equivalent is required. C1 at (A8), pin 6 (fig. 31).
e. Set the 520 to the X10 uuf scale,
50. Tuning Capacitor C1 Alignment loosen the clamp on the C1 tuning shaft,
(fig. 39) and adjust the shaft of tuning capacitor
C1 for an indication of 6.8 on the 520.
Align tuning capacitor C1 as outlined in Note: Check to see that this adjustment has been
a through h below. Do not change the con- made on the proper side of the capacity-per-degree
66
rotation curve by turning C1 counterclockwise (from the ground lead to the RT-505/PRC chas-
shaft end) and noting that the 520 indicates a de- sis.
crease in capacity. Reset to 68 microfarads (uuf).
d. Connect the other lead of the 520 to
f. Tighten clamp on the Cl tuning shaft.
the stator section of tuning capacitor C2
g. Adjust the RT-505/PRC-25 tuning
at A3, pin 6 (fig. 31).
knobs to 52.95. The 520 should indicate
e. Set the 520 on the X10 uuf scale,
10 uuf, or a difference of 58 uuf from the
loosen the clamp on the C1 tuning shaft,
30.00 mc indication (e above).
and adjust the s h a f t of the tuning ca-
h. If a difference of approximately 58
pacitor C2 for an indication of 6.8 on the
uuf is not obtained, repeat the procedure
given in b through g above. 520.
Note: Check to see that this adjustment has been
i. Replace module A8 in the chassis. made on the proper side of the capacity-per-degree
rotation curve by turning C2 clockwise (from shaft
51. Alignment of Tuning Capacitor C2 end) and noting that the 520 indicates a decrease
in capacity; reset to 68 uuf.
(fig. 39)
f. Tighten the clamp on the C2 tuning
Align tuning capacitor C2 as outlined shaft.
below. Do not change the control settings g. Adjust the tuning knobs to 52.95 mc.
unless specifically directed. The 520 should indicate a difference of
a. Remove module A3 from the chassis. approximately 58 uuf.
b. Adjust the tuning knobs for 30.00 mc h. If a difference of approximately 58
and set the BAND switch at 30-52. uuf is not obtained, repeat the procedure
c. Use a Ballantine Direct Capacity given in b through g above.
Meter Model 520 or equivalent. Connect i. Replace module A3 in the chassis.
Section III. FOURTH ECHELON TESTING PROCEDURES
52. General umns; then perform each specific test

procedure and verify it against its per-
a. The testing procedures are prepared formance standard.
for use by Signal Field Maintenance Shops
and Signal Service organizations respon- 53. Test Equipment, Tools, Materials, and
sible for fourth echelon maintenance of
Additional Equipment Required
signal equipment to determine the accept-
ability of repaired signal equipment. These a. General. All test equipment, tools,
procedures set forth specific require- materials, and other equipment required
ments that a repaired Receiver -Trans - to perform the testing procedures given
mitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25 must meet in this section are listed in the following
before it is returned to the using organ- charts and are authorized under TA 11-
ization. The testing procedures may also 17, Signal Field Maintenance Shops, and
be used as a guide for the testing of TA 11-100(11-17), Allowances of Signal
equipment at third echelon if the proper Corps Expendable Supplies for Signal
tools and test equipments are available. Field Maintenance Shop, Continental United
A summary of the performance standards States.
is given in paragraph 67. b. Special Requirements.
b. Comply with the instructions preced- (1) Specific models of test equipment
ing each chart before proceeding to the were used to perform the test pro-
chart. Perform each test in sequence. cedures given in paragraphs 56
Do not vary the sequence. For each step, through 66. If these test procedures
perform all the actions required in the are performed using other models
Test equipment control settings a n d of the test equipments, it may be
Equipment under test control settings col- necessary to allow for test con-
67
nections or test indications that
may differ from those given in Nomenclature Federal stock No.
the test procedures.

(2) Unless otherwise specified, all Connector UG-88/U
Cable, RG-58/U (36 inches) 6145-542-6092
tests are to be performed with Test cable No. 2, consisting
the RT-505/PRC-25 connected to of?
Battery, Dry BA-386/PRC-25. Clip, Electrical, Alligator 5940-186-9833
style.
(3) The electrical tests should be con- Wire, stranded AWG No. 6145-160-5291
ducted in a screen room. If avail- 18.
I
able, use Inclosure, Electromag- aMust be fabricated by maintenance personnel (para .54).
netic Shielding MX-1761/G or its

equivalent.
c. Test Equipment. 54. Fabrication of Test Cables and
Dummy Antenna
Technical manual
Nomenclature
I a. Dummy Antenna. A special 50-ohm
20-db pad (dummy antenna) is required
Audio Oscillator TS- TM 11-6625-261-12
382F/U. to couple the output of Signal Generator
Voltmeter, Meter ME-30A/U TM 11-6625-320-12 AN/URM-48 to the input of the RT-505/
Frequency Me@ AN/USM- TM 11-5057 PRC-25. Fabricate the special 50-ohm,
26.
RF Wattmeter AN/URM-43A TM 11-5133 20-db dummy antenna as shown in figure
Signal Generator AN/URM- TM 11-1257 41.
48 (two required). b. Test Cable No. 1. Fabricate test
Spectrum Analyzer TS- TM 11-5097
723AfU. cable No. 1 as illustrated in figure 41.
Meter, Modulation ME-57/U TM 11-6625-400-12 c. Test Cable No. 2. Fabricate test
Radio Set AN/PRC-25 ------ TM 11-5820-398-10 cable No. 2 as illustrated in figure 41.
MuMimeter ME-26 B/U ----- TM 11-6625-200-12
d. Additional Equipment.
Nomenclature Federal stock No.
Inolosure, Electromagnetic 4940-542-0002

Shieldiug MX-1761/G or
equivalent.
Tool Kit TK-87/U ------------ 5180-690-4452
Resistors:
1,000 ohms, *1%, 5 Watta
10,000 Ohm$ *5%, 1 watt, 5905-692-6543
variable.
15,000 ohms *5%, 1 watt--- 5905-102-2824
Capacitor, 0.05 uf *1 O%, 600 5910-112-7619
Vdc.
Dmnmy antenna, consisting of ?
Resistor, 56 ohms, 1 watt Figure 41.
(two required)
Resistor, 510 ohms, 1 watt, 5905-114-1607
*5%.
Connector UG-447/U (two
required).
Aluminum container, 6 in. None
by 2-1/2 in. by 2-1/2 in.
Wire, stranded AWG No. 6145-160-5291
18 (as required).
Adapter, UG-274B/U
Cable Assembly, Radio Fre- 5995-823-2965
quency CG-1773/U.
Toggle switch, stigle pole, 5930-655-1517
single throw.
Te$acable No. 1, consisting
68
55.
69
Figure 42.
70
56.
71
Figure 43.
72
57.
73
Figure 44.
74
58.
75
77
Figure 45.
78
59.
79
81
Figure 46.
60.
83
Figure 47.
84
61.
85
Figure 48.
86
figure 48
62.
87
89
Figure 49.
90
figure 49
63.
91
93
Figure 50.
94
figure 50
64.
95
97
Figure 51.
98
figure 51
65.
99
101
Figure 52.
102
figure 52
66.
103
67. Summary of Test Data Test
Test Performance standard
data
Personnel may find it convenient to
arrange the checklist in a manner similar 8. RECEIVER CATCHING
to that shown below. RANGE
a. 31.50 mc 300 kc minimum
Test deviation above
Test Performance standard
data
and below 31.50
m c .
1. TRANSMITTER POWER b. 5 1 . 5 0 mc 300 kc minimum
OUTPUT deviation above
a. 30.00 mc 2 watts minimum and below 31.50
b. 4 2 . 0 0 mc 2 watts minimum m c .
c. 52.95 mc 2 watts minimum
d. 5 3 . 0 0 mc 1.5 watts minimum 9. SQUELCH SENSITIVITY
e. 65.00 mc 1.5 watts minimum a. F u n c t i o n switch in Squelch relay ener-
f 75.95 mc 1.5 watts minimum SQUELCH (30. 00 gizes when speci-
mc). fied audio level is
2. TONE OSCILLATOR
FREQUENCY AND present.
b. F u n c t i o n switch in Same as above.
TRANSMITTER
SQUELCH (41. 00
MODULATION
mc).
a/ Frequency deviation - 3.0 kc 0.5
c. Function switch in Same as above.
at 41.00 mc
150 cps 1.5 SQUELCH (52. 00
b. M o d u l a t i n g frequency -
mc).
at 41.00 mc
d. Function switch in Same as above.
3. SYSTEM DISTORTION SQUELCH (53. 00
Distortion at 41.00 mc - 10% max mc).
e. Function switch in Same as abwe.
4. FREQUENCY ACCU-
SQUELCH (65. 00
RACY
mc.)
a. 75.00 mc 75.00 mc 3. 5 kc
f. Function switch in Same as above.
b. 7 5 . 0 5 mc 75.05 mc 3.5 kc
SQUELCH (75. 00
C. 75.10-75.90 mc (in 75.10-75.90 mc
3.5 kc mc).
100-kc increments)
d. 75.95 mc 75.95 mc 3.5 kc
10. RECEIVER DISTOR-
e. 52.00 mc 52.00 mc 3.5 kc
TION
5. MAXIMUM SIGNAL a. At 41.00 mc 5% max
PLUS NOISE-TO- b. A t 2-volt output 10% max
NOISE RATIO
At 41.00 mc Not less than 40 db 11. TRANSMITTER DEVIA-
greater than in- TION.
dication in test (ME-30A/U range se-
procedure step lb lector switch at
(para 60c). .003 VOLTS, -50DB)
a. 30.00 mc 10 kc 2
6. RECEIVER AUDIO
b. 5 2 . 0 0 mc 10 kc 2
OUTPUT POWER
c. 54.00 mc 10 kc 2
At 41.00 mc Not less than 2
d. 7 5 . 0 0 mc 10 kc 2
volts on ME-
30A/U.
12. TRANSMITTER DEVIA-
7. RECEIVER SENSITI- TION.
VITY (ME-30A/U range se-
a. 30.00 mc 10 db less in DIS- lector switch at .01
TORTION posi- VOLTS, -40DB)
tion than SET a. 3 0 . 0 0 mc Less than 1.414 of
LEVEL position 11a.
on TS-723A/U. b. 5 2 . 0 0 mc Less than 1.414 of
b. 4 1 . 0 0 mc Same as above. 11b.
c. 52.00 mc Same as above. c. 54.00 mc Less than 1.414 of
d. 53.00 mc Same as above. 11c.
e. 65.00 mc Same as above. d. 7 5 . 0 0 mc Less than 1.414 of
f. 7 5 . 9 5 mc Same as above. 11d.
105
CHAPTER 5
FIFTH ECHELON MAINTENANCE
68. Scope of Fifth Echelon Maintenance each module. Each procedure, where ap-
The functions allocated to fifth echelon plicable, consists of preparation instruc-
maintenance level include troubleshooting, tions, test and alignment procedures, and
faulty part isolation information.
repair, and alignment of modular assem-
blies. Also included is replacement of b. Rf test signals are unmodulated un-
parts in the selector mechanism assembly less otherwise specified. When the fre-
and in module A10. quency of a signal generator is specified
without an accompanying tolerance (an
69. Test Equipment and Additional example of frequency with a tolerance
specified is 29, 950 kc ±5), set the fre-
Equipment Required
quency, by using the AN/USM-26, to the
a. Test Equipment. exact number of significant figures desig-
nated.
Item
I Technical manual
c. Use a receiver-transmitter (that is
known to be good) as a test set. When work-
Audio Oscillator TS-382F/U TM 11-6625-261-12 ing on a module, remove the cover and
Voltmeter, Meter ME-30A/U TM 11-6625-320-12
Frequenoy Meter AN/USM-26 TM 11-5057 plug the module into the test set. When
Meter, Modulation ME-57/U TM 11-6625-400-12 alignment is required, replace those cov-
Multimeter ME-26B/U ------- TM 11-6625-200-12 ers that have alignment holes. Use the
oscilloscope AN/usM-50A---- TM 11-5129
R. F. Signal Generator AN/ TM 11-5551E module extender (fig, 27) only when di-
URM-25F. rected.
Signal Generator AN/URM-46 TM 11-1257 (1). Remove Battery Box CY-2562/
Radio Frequency Wattmeter TM 11-5133
AN/URM-43A. PRC-25 from the receiver-trans-
Speotrum Analyzer TS-723B/U TM 11-5097 mitter case.
RF Millivoltmeter 411A (2) Remove the receiver-transmitter
Transistor Power Supply 721A
case from the receiver-transmit-
ter.
b. Additional Equipmen t Required. (3) Connect the battery cable between
(1) Battery cable; a three-conductor Battery, Dry BA-386/PRC-25 (that
cable of suitable length, with a bat- is known to be good) and the battery
tery plug on one end, and a battery plug on the receiver-transmitter.
receptacle on the other. (4) Turn on the test equipment and al-
(2) Alignment cover (fig. 28). low a 5-minute warmup period.
(3) ModuIe extender (fig. 27).
Caution: Do not place the re-
(4) Adapter UG-274B/U. ceiver-transmitter in a transmit
(5) Resistor, 470-ohm, l-watt. condition with a wattmeter con-
(6) Handset H-138/U. nected or an antenna installed.
(7) Dummy antenna (fig. 41).
Waring: The power amplifier
plate voltage is +150 volts dc. Take
70. GeneraI
all necessary precautions to pro-
Caution: Refer to the caution notice on tect personnel and test equipment.
the inside front cover of this manual be-
fore connecting equipment or making tests. 71. Isolating Trouble in Module A1
a. The module assembly trouble isola- (fig. 26 and 53)
tion procedures given in this chapter are a. Preparation.
organized to localize and isolate trouble (1) Prepare the following equipment:
in defective modules of the RT-505/PRC- (a) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
25. A separate procedure is provided for (b) Handset H-138/U.
106
(2) Connect the handset to either UG-274B/U to the connector o n
AUDIO connector. the other end of the dummy an-
b. Performance Test. tenna.
(1) Press the handset push-to-talk (6) Set the AN/URM-48 frequency to
switch. 30,000 mc as indicated on the AN/
(2) Set the ME-26 B/U to the 300-volt, USM-26. Adjust the deviation for
dc range. Normal indication at J3 ±10kc at 1,000 cps.
is +125 volts; normal indication at (7) Set the receiver-transmitter front
J2 is -45 volts dc. panel controls as follows:
c. Faulty Part Isolation. (a) BAND switch at 30-52.
Note: Make all measurements with respect to (b) Tuning knobs at 30.00 mc.
ground unless otherwise specified. (c) Function switch at ON.
(1) Measure the dc resistances at the b. Bandwidth Test.
points listed below and compare (1) Connect the 411A between pins 1
them with the normal resistances. and 4 of A2J1.
Meter indications (ohms)
(2) Adjust the output of the AN/URM-
Point of
48 for a 25-millivolt indication on
me=urement Negative lead
grounded
Pasitive lead
ground ed
the 411A.
(3) Disconnect the 411A from pins 1
Q1 base ----------- 1000 1.2 and 4 of A2J1 and connect it be-
Q1 emitter to J1 pin C 8 100 tween pins 2 and 3 of A2J1. The
Q1 collector -------- 0 0 411A should indicate 4.5 db less
Q2 base ----------- 1000 1.2
Q2 emitter to J1 pin C 8 100 than the indication not e d in (2)
Q2 collector 0 0 above. (This value, -4.5 db, is the
CR1-A1CR4 junction 470K 50 input-to-output voltage ratio.)
CR3-A1CR2 junction 1 meg 40
Jo------------------ 1.5 meg 1.5 meg (4) Adjust the AN/URM-48 level to
J3 ----------------- 1.5 meg 1.5 meg obtain a 0-db indication on the
411A.
(5) Increase the AN/URM-48 fre-
(2) After replacing a faulty part, requency until the 411A indicates a
peat the procedures given in b 3-db decrease. Record this fre-
above. quency.
72. Isolating Trouble in Module A2 (6) Decrease the AN/URM-48 fre-
(fig. 15 and 54) quency to obtain a 0-db indication
on the 411A.
a. Preparation. (7) Further decrease the AN/URM-48
(1) Prepare the following equipment: frequency until the 411A indicates
(a) Signal Generator AN/URM-48. a 3-db decrease. Record this fre-
(b) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26. quency.
(c) Dummy antenna (fig. 41). (8) Return the AN/URM-48 frequency
(d) Adapter UG-274B/U. to obtain a 0-db indication on the
(e) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A. 411A.
(2) Connect a Cord CG-530/U (part of (9) Compute the difference between
the AN/USM-26) between ANT con- the frequencies recorded in (5) and
nector J2 on the receiver-trans- (7) above. The freqpency difference
mitter and one end of the dummy is the 3-db bandwidth, which should
antenna. be 400 kc.
(3) Connect the output of the AN/URM- (10) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency
48 to a male connector of the UG- to 52.950 mc as indicated by the
274B/U. AN/USM-26.
(4) Connect the AN/USM-26 to the (11) Repeat (1) through (9) above. The
other male connector of the UG- input-to-output voltage ratio noted
274B/U. in (3) should be -3.0 db; the 3-db
(5) Connect the female connector of bandwidth computed in the
107
Figure 53. Module A1 parts location.
108
procedure given in (9) above should (1) BAND switch at 30-52.
be 1,100 kc. (2) Tuning knobs for 30.00 mc.
(12) Change the receiver-transmitter (3) Function switch at ON.
BAND switch to 53-75. e. Alignnment Procedures.
(13) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency (1) Connect the 411A between pins 1
to 53.000 mc as indicated by the and 4 of A2J1.
AN/USM-26. (2) Adjust the output of the AN/URM-
(14) Repeat the procedures given in (1) 48 for 30.00 mc and a 25-millivolt
through (9) above. The input-to- indication on the 411A.
output voltage ratio noted in (3) (3) Disconnect the 411A from pins 1
above should be +1 db; the 3-db and 4 of A2J1 and connect it be-
bandwidth computed in the proce- tween pins 2 and 3 of A2J1.
dure given in (9) above should be (4) Tune transformer T1 for a peak
3,300 kc. voltage indication on the 411A.
(15) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency (5) Set the receiver-transmitter tun-
to 75.950 mc as indicated by the ing knobs at 52.95 mc, and adjust
AN/USM-26. the AN/URM-48 to 52.95 mc.
(16) Repeat the procedures given in (1) (6) Tune capacitor C1 for a peak volt-
through (9) above. The input-to- age indication on the 411A.
output voltage ratio noted in (3) (7) Repeat the procedures given in (1)
above should be -0.5 db; the 3-db through (6) above until the 411A
bandwidth computed in the proce- indication for 30.00 mc and 52.95
dure given in (9) above should be mc can no longer be increased by
15,000 kc. tuning.
(17) If the bandwidth or the input-to- (8) Set the receiver-transmitter front
output voltage ratio does not meet panel controls as follows:
the given standards, proceed to c (a) BAND switch at 53-75.
below. (b) Tuning knobs at 53.00 mc.
c. Faulty Parts Isolation. (9) Repeat the procedures given (1),
(1) Adjust the AN/URM-48 for a 25- (2), and (3) above, except change
millivolt rf signal at the frequen- the frequency noted in (2) above
cies indicated in the chart below to 52.95 mc.
and measure the voltages at the (10) T u n e t r a n s f o r m e r T 2 f o r a
switch terminals listed. Compare peak voltage indication on the
them with the nor ma 1 signals 411A.
listed. (11) Set the receiver-transmitter tun-
Note: Measure all voltages to ground. ing knobs at 75.95 mc, and adjust
Frequency input
the AN/URM-48 frequency to 75.95
Point of measurement Millivolts (UIIS)
(mc ) mc.
(12) Tune capacitor C2 for a peak volt-
SID-2 30 23.5 age indication on the 411A.
SIA-2 30 135.0
SIC-2 30 140.0 (13) Repeat the procedures given in (9)
SID-2 53 26.0 through (12) above until the 411A
SIA-2 53 70.0
SIC-2 53 42.0 indication for 53.00 mc and 75.95
mc cannot be increased by
(2) After replacing a faulty part, per- tuning.
form the alignment procedures
given in d and e below and then re- 73. Isolating Trouble Within Modules
peat the procedures given in a and
A3 and A4
b above.
d. Preparation for Alignment. Set the Because modules A3 and A4 are similar,
receiver-transmitter front panel controls their maintenance procedures are similar.
as follows: Refer to figures 1 and 2 for schematic
109
Figure 54. Module A2 parts location.
diagrams and to figures 55 and 56 for test (2) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency
points and parts location. to 30.00 mc and the level to 10
a.Preparation. millivolts as indicated by the
(1) Prepare the following equipment: 411A.
(a) Signal Generator AN/URM-48. (3) Disconnect the 411A from J2 and
(b) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26. connect it between pins 3 and 4 of
(c) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A. J1 in the module under test. Note
(d) Adapter UG-274B/U. the output level.
(e) Multimeter ME-26B/U. (4) Compute the gain by subtracting
(2) Connect the AN/URM-48 output to the input db level noted in (2) above
a male connector of the UG-274B/ from the output db level noted in
u. (3) above. Normal gain is 16 db or
(3) Connect the AN/USM-26 to the greater.
other male connector of the UG- (5) R e c o n n e c t t h e 4 1 1 A t o t e s t
274B/U. point J2 of the m o du 1 e under
(4) Connect the female end of the UG- test.
274B/U to the receiver-transrnit- (6) Increase the AN/URM-48 level
ter ANT connector. until the 411A indicates 20 milli-
(5) Set the AN/URM-48 frequency to volts .
30.00 mc; set the deviation to 10 (7) Repeat the procedure given in (3)
kc at 1,000 cps. above.
b. Gain and Bandwidth Test. (8) Decrease the AN/URM-48 fre-
(1) Connect the 411A to J2 of the mod- quency until the output level indi-
ule under test. cated by the 411A is at the level
110
noted in (3) above. Record the fre- (b) Dc voltage chart.
quency. Volts (de)
(9) Increase the AN/URM-48 fre- Point of measurement
A3 A4
quency until the output level indi- I
cated by the 411A is again at the C4-L1 junction ---- 10 10
level noted in (3) above. Record Q1 collector ------ 10 10
Q1 base ---------- 1.3 ;:;
the frequency. Q1 emitter -------- 0.6
(10) Compute the difference between J1-1 ------------- 0.0 0.0
the frequencies noted in (8) and (9) J1-4 ------------- 0.0 0.0
above. The frequency difference
is the 6-db bandwidth, which should (2)
. . After the replacement of a faulty
be 700 kc. part, perform the alignment pro:
(11) Repeat the procedures given in (1) cedure given in d and e below and
through (10) above for A3 at 52.95 repeat the procedures given in a
mc, 53.00 mc, and 75.95 mc. The and b above.
gain noted in (4) above should be d. Preparation for Alignment.
14 db, 12 db, and 12 db respectively. (1) Set the receiver-tansmitter front
The bandwidth computed in the pro- panel controls as follows:
cedures given in (10) above should (a) Set the BAND switch and the tun-
be 2,000 kc, 2,500 kc, and 6,700 kc, ing knobs at the AN/URM-48 fre-
respectively. quency.
(12) Repeat the procedures given in (1) (b) Set the function switch at ON.
through (10) above for A4 at 30.00 (c) Remove A5.
mc, 52.95 mc, 53.00 mc, and 75.95 (2) Connect a shorting jumper between
mc. The gain noted in (4) above pins E and H of J9 (receptacle for
should be 13.5 db, 19 db, 15 db, A5) .
and 13.5 db respectively. The band- e. Alignment Procedures.
width computed in (10) above should (1) Adjust the AN/URM-48 output fre-
be 700 kc, 1,200 kc, 1,600 kc, and quency to 30.00 mc. Connect the
3,100 kc respectively. 411A between pin B of J9 and
(13) If either the gain or bandwidth tests ground.
or both do not meet the outlined (2) Tune transformer T2 for a peak
standards of the procedure, pro- indication on the 411A.
ceed to d and e below. (3) Change the AN/URM-48 frequency
c. Faulty Parts Isolation. to 52.00 mc.
(1) Apply a 30.00 mc signal to the (4) Tune capacitor C7 for a peak indi-
receiver-transmitter ANT con- cation on the 411A.
nector, adjusted to 10 millivolts (5) Repeat the procedures give n in
at test point J2 of A3. Measure (1) through (4) above until the 411A
the voltages at the points outlined indication for 30.00 mc and
below. Compare them with the 52.00 mc cannot be increased by
normal signal and dc voltages tuning.
listed. (6) Adjust the AN/URM-48 and the re-
Note: Measure all voltages to ground. ceiver-transmitter to 53.00 mc.
(a) Signal voltage chart. (7) Tune transformer T3 for a peak
indication on the 411A.
Millivol@ (rms)
(8) Change the AN/URM-48 and the
A3 A4 receiver-transmitter frequency to
75.95 mco
(9) Tune capacitor C9 for a peak indi-
cation on the 411A.
(10) Repeat the procedures given in (6)
through (9) above until the 411A
111
indication cannot be increased by b. Gain and Bandwidth Test.
tuning. (1) Connect the 411A between pins B
(11) Remove the shorting jumper from and A of A5J1.
pins E and H of J9. (2) Adjust the AN/URM-48 level to
(12) Replace A5. obtain a 50-millivolt indication on
the 411A. (Note the db indication.)
(3) Disconnect the 411A from pins A
74. Isolating Trouble in Module AS
and B; connect it between pins C
(fig. 3 and 57) and D of A5J1. Note the db indica-
a. Preparation. tion.
(1) Prepare the following equipment: (4) Compute the gain by subtracting
(a) Signal Generator AN/URM-48. the db level noted in (2) above from
(b) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26. the db level noted in (3). Normal
(c) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A. gain is 2.5 db.
(d) Adapter UG-274B/U. (5) Connect the 411A between A21J3
(e) Multimeter ME-26B/U. and chassis ground and note the db
(2) Connect the AN/URM-48 output to level.
a male connector of the UG-274B/ (6) Repeat the procedures given in (1)
U. and (2) above, except adjust the
(3) Connect the AN/USM-26 to the AN/URM-48 level to obtain a 100-
other male connector of the UG- millivolt indication on the 411A.
274B/U. (7) Disconnect the 411A from pins A
(4) Connect the female connector of and B of A5J1 and connect it be-
the UG-274B/U to the receiver tween A21J3 and chassis ground.
transmitter ANT connector. (8) Decrease the AN/URM-48 fre-
(5) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency quency until the level indicated by
for 30.00 mc, with a deviation of the 411A is again at the level noted
10 kc at 1,000 cps. in (5) above. Record the frequency.
Figure 55. Module A 3 parts location.
112
Figure 56. Module Ad parts location.
(9) Increase the AN/URM-48 fre- (a) Signal voltage chart.

quency until the level indicated by
the 411A is again at the level Point of measurement Millivolts (rms)
noted in (5) above. Record the

frequency. Q1 collector ----------------------- 100
(10) Compute the difference between the J2 --------------------------------- ’73
frequencies noted in (8) and (9) Q1 base --------------------------- 10
R9-C6 junction -------------------- 97
above. The frequency difference is Q2 collector ----------------------- 360
the 6-db bandwidth, which should be Q2 base --------------------------- 8.6
Q2 emitter ------------------------- L7
at least 32 kc.
(11) Perform the procedures given in (b) Dc voltage chart.
(1) through (10) above for 75.95 mc,
except that normal gain in (4) above
is 0 db.
I Volta (dc )
(12) If either the gain or bandwidth tests J1-G ------------------------------ 10

or both do not meet the outlined Qlcolleotor ----------------------- 9.8
standards of the procedure, pro- Ql base --------------------------- 0.65
Q1 emitter ------------------------ 0.0
ceed to e and f below. Q2base --------------------------- 8.4
c. Faulty Parts Isolation. Q2 emitter ------------------------- 8.8
Q2colktor ----------— ----------- 0.0
(1) Apply a 30.00-mc, 10-millivolt
signal to the module under test. (2) After the replacement of a faulty
Measure the voltages at the points part, perform the alignment pro-
outlined below. Compare them with cedure given in d and e below and
the normal signal and dc voltages repeat the procedures given in a
listed. and b above.
Note. Measure all voltages to ground. d. Preparation for Alignment. Set the
113
receiver-transmitter front panel controls (2) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO
as follows: connector.
(1) Turn the BAND switch to 30-52. (3) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT
(2) Turn the tuning knobs to 30.00 mc. connector J2.
(3) Turn the function switch to ON. (4) Place the front panel controls of
e. Alignment Procedure. the Receiver-Transmitter as fol-
(1) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency lows:
to 30.000 mc and adjust the output (a) BAND switch at 30-52.
for 10 millivolts between pins A and (b) Tuning knobs to 30.00 mc.
B of A5J1. (c) Function switch at ON.
(2) Connect the 411A between A21J3 (5) Remove module A7.
and chassis ground. (6) Connect the output of the AN/URM-
(3) Adjust A5T2 for a peak indication 48 to the input of AN/USM-26. Ad-
on the 411A. just AN/URM-48 for 30.000 mc, as
(4) Disconnect all connections. indicated by the AN/USM-26.
(5) Replace the module cover. (7) Press the push-to-talk switch on
the H-138/U.
75. Isolating Trouble in Module A6 b. Gain and Bandwidth Test.
(fig. 13 and 58) (1) Connect the output of the AN/URM-
a. Preparation. 48 between pins 1 and 2 of A6J1.
(1) Prepare the following equipment: (2) Connect the 411A across the AN/
(a) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26. URM-48 output. Adjust the AN/
(b) Signal Generator AN/URM-48. URM-48 for a 100-millivolt indica-
(c) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A. tion on the 411A. (Note the db indi-
(d) Handset H-138/U. cation.)
(g) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A. (3) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/
Multimeter ME-26B/U. URM-48 and connect it between
pins 1 and 2 of S1J1. The 411A
should indicate 22 db more than the
indication obtained in the proce-
dure given in (2) above. (This value,
+22 db, is the stage gain.)
(4) Adjust the AN/URM-48 level to ob-
tain a 0-db indication on the 411A.
Increase the AN/URM-48 fre-
quency until the 411A indicates a
3-db decrease.
(6) Connect the AN/URM-48 to the AN/
USM-26 and record the frequency.
Decrease the frequency of the AN/
URM-48 to 30.00 mc.
(7) Connect the AN/URM-48 between
pins 1 and 2 of A6J1.
(8) Decrease the frequency of the AN/
URM-48 until the 411A indicates a
3-db decrease.
(9) Connect the AN/URM-48 to the AN/
USM-26 and record the frequency.
Increase the AN/URM-48 fre-
quency to 30.00 mc.
(10) Compute the difference between the
frequencies recorded in the proce-
Figure 57. Module A6, parts location. dure given in (6) and (9) above. The
114
frequency difference is the 3-db (a) Signal voltage chart.
bandwidth, which should be 1,200
kc. Point of measurement Voltage (rms )
(11) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency I
to 52.95 mc as indicated by the AN/ J2 ---------------------------- 0.100
USM-26. Q1 emitter -------------------- 0.054
(12) Repeat the procedure given in (1) Q1 collector ------------------- 1.3
Q1 base ----------------------- 0.044
through (10) above; return the AN/
URM-48 to 52.95 mc noted in (6) (b) Dc voltage chart.
and (9) above.
(13) The gain noted in (3) above should Point of measurement I Vo,rs (k)
be +21 db; the 3-db bandwidth com-
puted in the procedure given in (10) -45
above should be 900 kc. J1-3 --------------------------
Q1 emitter -------------------- -39
(14) Change the receiver-transmitter Q1 base ----------------------- -38
BAND switch to 53-75. Q1 colleotor ------------------- 0
(15) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency
to 53.00 mc as indicated by the AN/ (2) After the replacement of a faulty
USM-26. part, perform the alignment proce-
(16) Repeat the procedure given in (1) dure given in d and e below and
through (10) above; return the AN/ repeat the procedures given in a
URM-48 to 53.00 mc instead of the and b above.
indication given in (6) and (9) above. d. Preparation fbr Alignment.
(17) The gain noted in (3) above should (1) Set the receiver-transmitter front
be +18 db; the 3-db bandwidth com- panel controls as follows:
puted in the procedure given in (10) (a) BAND switch at 30-52.
above should be 1,300 kc. (b) Function switch at ON.
(18) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency (2) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT
to 75.95 mc as indicated by the AN/ connector J2.
USM-26 . (3) Remove module A7.
(19) Repeat the procedure given in (1) (4) Connect the AN/URM-48 between
through (10) above; return the AN/ pins 1 and 2 of A6J1.
URM-48 to 75.95 mc instead of the e. Alignment Procedure.
indication given in (6) and (9) above. (1) Set the receiver-transmitter tun-
(20) The gain noted in (3) above should ing knobs for 30.00 mc.
be +12 db; the 3-db bandwidth com- (2) Connect the 411A across the output
puted in the procedure given in (10) of the AN/URM-48.
above should be 4,000 kc. (3) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO
(21) Replace module A7. and press the push-to-talk switch.
(22) If the gain and bandwidth do not (4) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency
meet the outlined standards of the to 30.00 mc and the level to 100
procedure, proceed to c below. millivolts, as indicated by the
c. Faulty Parts Isolation. 411A.
(1) Remove module A7. Connect the H- (5) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/
138/U to an AUDIO connector and URM-48 and connect it between
press the push-to-talk switch. Ap- pins 1 and 2 of S1J1.
ply a 30.00 mc, 100-millivolt signal (6) Adjust T2 for a peak indication on
between pins 1 and 2 of A6J1. Meas- the 411A,
ure the voltages at the points out- (7) Change the AN/URM-48 frequency
lined below. Compare them with the and the receiver-transmitter tun-
normal signal and dc voltages ing knobs to 52.95 mc.
listed. (8) Adjust C6 for a peak indication on
Note: Measure all voltages to ground. the 411A.
115
(9) Repeat the procedures given in (1) 76. Isolating Trouble in Module A7
through (8) above until the 411A (fig. 12 and 59)
indication cannot be increased by
a. Preparation
tuning.
(lo) Set the BAND switch on the re- (1) Prepare the following equipment:
ceiver-transmitter at 53-75, and (a) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26.
the tuning knobs at 53.00 mc. (b) Signal Generator AN/URM-48.
(11) Disconnect the 411A from J1S1 and (c) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A.
connect it across the AN/URM-48 (d) Handset H-138/U.
output. (e) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A.
(12) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency (f) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
to 53.00 mc and the level to 100 (2) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO
millivolts, as indicated by the connector.
411A. (3) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT
(13) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/ connector J2.
URM-48 and connect it between (4) Set the front panel controls of the
pins 1 and 2 of S1J1. receiver-transmitter as follows:
(14) Adjust T3 for a peak indication on (a) BAND switch at 30-52.
the 411A. (b) Tuning knobs at 30.00 mc.
(15) Change the AN/URM-48 frequency (c) Function switch at ON.
and the RT-505/PRC-25 tuning (5) Remove module A8.
knobs to 75.95 mc. (6) Connect the AN/URM-48 output to
(16) Adjust C8 for a peak indication on the input of the AN/USM-26. Adjust
the 411A. the AN/URM-48 for 30.000 mc, as
(17) Repeat (10) through (16) above un- indicated by the AN/USM-26.
til the 411A indication cannot be in- b. Gain and Bandwidth Test.
creased by tuning. (1) Connect the output of AN/URM-48
(18) Replace A7. between pins 1 and 2 of J1.
Figure 58. Module A6, parts location.
116
(2) Connect the 411A across the AN/ AN/URM-48 to 53.00 mc instead of
URM-48 output. Press the push-to- the indication given in ((6) and (9)
talk switch. Adjust the AN/URM-48 above).
for a 100-millivolt indication on the (17) The gain noted in (3) above should
411A. (Note the db indication.) be +9.5 db; the 3-db bandwidth com-
(3) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/ puted in (10) above should be 1,400
URM-48 and connect it between kc.
pins 3 and 4 of J1. The 411A should (18) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency
indicate 16 db more than the value to 75.95 mc as indicated by the AN/
indicated in (2) above. (This value, USM-26. Set the receiver-trans-
+16 db, is the stage gain.) mitter tuning knobs for the same
(4) Adjust the AN/URM-48 level to frequency.
obtain a 0-db indication on the (19) Repeat the procedures given in (1)
411A. through (10) above; return the AN/
(5) Increase the AN/URM-48 fre- URM-48 to 75.95 mc instead of the
quency until the 411A indicates a indication given in ((6) and (9)
3-db decrease. above).
(6) Connect the AN/URM-48 to the AN/ (20) The gain noted in (3) above should
USM-26 and record the frequency. be +10 db; the 3-db bandwidth com-
Decrease the frequency of the AN/ puted in (10) above should be 2,800
URM-48 to 30.00 mc. kc.
(7) Connect the AN/URM-48 between (21) Replace module A8.
pins 1 and 2 of J1. (22) If the gain and bandwidth do not
(8) Decrease the frequency of the AN/ meet the standards of the proce-
URM-48 until the 411A indicates a dure, proceed to c below.
3-db decrease. c. Faulty Parts Isolation.
(9) Connect the AN/URM-48 to the AN/ (1) Remove module A8. Connect the H-
USM-26 and record the frequency. 138/U to an AUDIO connector.
Increase the AN/URM-48 fre- Apply a 30.00 mc, 100-millivolt
quency to 30.00 mc. signal between pins 1 and 2 of A7J1.
(lo) Compute the difference between the Press the push-to-talk switch.
frequencies recorded in (6) and (9) Measure the voltages at the points
above. The frequency difference is outlined in the charts in a and b
the 3-db bandwidth, which should be below. Compare them with the nor-
1,300 kc. mal signal and dc voltages listed.
(11) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency Note: Measure all voltages to ground.
to 52.95 mc as indicated by the AN/ (a) Signal voltage chart.
USM-26.
(12) Repeat (1) through (10) above; re- Point of measurement Voltage (rnks.)
turn the AN/URM-48 to 52.95 mc

instead of the indication given in J2 ---------------------------- 0.100
((6) and (9) above). Q1 emitter -------------------- 0.100
Q1 collector ------------------ 1.45
(13) The gain noted in (3) above should Q1 base ----------------------- 0.100
be +15 db; the 3-db bandwidth com- J1-4 -------------------------- 0.650
puted in the procedure given in (10)
above should be 1,600 kc. (b) DC voltage chart.
(14) Change the receiver-transmitter
BAND switch to 53-75. Point of measurement Volts (de)
to 53.00 mc as indicatedbythe AN/ SIJ1-2 ------------------------- -45
USM-26. Q1 emitter ------------------—-- -37
(16) Repeat the procedures given in (1) Q1 base --------------------——— -36
through (10) above, returning the Q1 collector ------------------— 0
117
(2) After the replacement of a faulty (13) Adjust T2 for a peak indication on
part, perform the alignment proce- the 411A.
dures given in d and e below, and (14) Change the AN/URM-48 frequency
repeat the procedures in a and b and the receiver-transmitter tun-
above. ing knobs for 75.95 mc.
d. Preparation fix Alignment. (15) Adjust C6 for a peak indication on
(1) Set the receiver-transmitter front the 411A.
panel controls as follows: (16) Repeat the prc cedures given in (9)
(a) BAND switch at 30-52. through (15) above until the 411A
(b) Function switch at ON. indication cannot be increased by
(2) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT tuning.
connector J2. (17) Replace A8.
(3) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO
connector. 77. Isolating Trouble in Module A8
(4) Remove module A8. (fig. 11 and 60)
pins 1 and 2 of A7J1. a. Preparation.
e. Alignment Procedure. (1) Prepare the following equipment:
(1) Set the receiver-transmitter tun- (a) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26.
ing knobs for 30.00 mc. (b) Signal Generator AN/URM-48.
(2) Connect the 411A across the output (c) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A.
of the AN/URM-48. Press the (d) Handset H-138/U.
push-to-talk switch. (e) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A.
(3) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency (f) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
to 30.00 mc and level to 100 milli- (2) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO
volts, as indicated by the 411A. connector.
(4) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/ (3) Connect AN/URM-43A to ANT con-
URM-48 and connect between pins nector J2.
3 and 4 of J1. (4) Set the front panel controls of the
(5) Adjust T3 for a peak indication on receiver-transmitter as follows:
the 411A. (a) BAND switch at 30-52.
(6) Change the AN/URM-48 frequency (b) Tuning knobs for 30.00 mc.
and the receiver-transmitter tun- (c) Function switch at ON.
ing knobs to 52.95 mc. (5) Remove module A9.
(7) Adjust C9 for a peak indication on (6) Connect the AN/URM-48 output to
the 411A. the input of the AN/USM-26. Adjust
(8) Repeat the procedures given in (1) AN/URM-48 for 30.000 mc, as in-
through (7) above until the 411A dicated by the AN/USM-26.
indication cannot be increased by b. Gain and Bandwidth Test.
tuning. (1) Connect the output of the AN/URM-
(9) Set the BAND switch on the re- 48 between pins 1 and 2 of A8J1.
ceiver-transmitter to 53-75, and (2) Connect the 411A across the AN/
the tuning knobs to 53.00 mc. URM-48 output. Press the push-to-
(10) Disconnect the 411A from J1 and talk switch. Adjust the AN/URM-48
connect it across the AN/URM-48 for a 100-millivolt indication on the
output. 411A. Note the db indication.
(11) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency (3) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/
to 53.00 mc and the level to 100 URM-48 and connect it between
millivolts, as indicated by the pins 3 and 4 of A8J1. The 411A
411A. should indicate 19 db more than the
(12) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/ value indicated in (2) above. (This
URM-48 and connect it between value, +19 db, is the stage gain.)
pins 3 and 4 of A7J1. (4) Adjust the AN/URM-48 level to ob-
118
tain a O-db indication on the 411A. indication given in (6) and (9) above.
(5) Increase the AN/URM-48 fre- (13) The gain noted in (3) should be +20
quency until the 411A indicates a db; the 3-db bandwidth computed in
3-db decrease. (10) above should be 1,100 kc.
(6) Connect the AN/URM-48to the AN/ (14) Change the receiver-transmitter
USM-26 and record the frequency. BAND switch to 53-75.
Decrease the AN/URM-48 to 30.00 (15) Adjust AN/URM-48 frequency to
mc. 53.00 mc as indicated by the AN/
(7) Connect the AN/URM-48 between USM-26.
pins 1 and 2 of A8J1. (16) Repeat (1) through (10) above; re-
(8) Decrease frequency of the AN/ turn the AN/URM-48 to 53.00 mc
URM-48 until the 411A indicates a instead of the indication given in (6)
3-db decrease. and (9) above.
(9) Connect the AN/URM-48 to the AN/ (17) The gain noted in (3) above should
USM-26 and record the frequency. be +18 db; the 3-db bandwidth com-
Increase the AN/URM-48 fre- puted in (10) above shouldbe 500 kc.
quency to 30.00 mc. (18) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency
(lo) Compute the difference between the to 75.95 mc as indicated by the AN/
frequencies recorded in (6) and (9) USM-26.
above. The frequency difference is (19) Repeat the procedures given in (1)
the 3-db bandwidth, which should be through (10) above, returning the
600 kc. AN/URM-48 to 75.95 mc instead of
(11) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency the indication given in (6) and (9)
to 52.95 mc as indicated by the AN/ above.
USM-26. (20) The gain noted in (3) above should
(12) Repeat the procedures given in (1) be +20 db; the 3-db bandwidth com-
through (10) above; return the AN/ puted in (10) should be 1,500 kc.
URM-48 to 52.95 mc instead of the (21) Replace module A9.
119
(22) If the gain and bandwidth do not to 30.00 mc and the level to 100
meet the standards of the proce- millivolts, as indicated by the
dure, proceed to c below. 411A.
c. Faulty Parts Isolation. (4) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/
(1) Remove module A9. Connect the H- URM-48 and connect it between
138/U to an AUDIO connector. Ap- pins 3 and 4 of J1.
ply a 30.00 mc, 100-millivolt signal (5) Adjust T2 for a peak indication on
between pins 1 and 2 of A8J1. Press the 411A.
the push-to-talk switch. Measure (6) Change the AN/URM-48 frequency
the voltages at the points given in and the receiver-transmitter tun-
the charts in (a) and (b) below. ing knobs to 52.95 mc.
Compare them with the normal sig- (7) Adjust C6 for a peak indication on
nal and dc voltages listed. the 411A.
Note: Measure all voltages to ground. (8) Repeat the procedures given in (1)
(a) Signal voltage chart. through (7) above until the 411A in-
dication cannot be increased by
Point of measurement Millivolb (rms) tuning.
(9) Set the BAND s witch on the re-
J2 ----------------------------- 100 ceiver-transmitter at 53-75, and
Q1 beee ------------------------ 180 the tuning knobs for 53.00 mc.
Q1 collector -------------------- 980 (10) Discomect the 411A from pins 3
J1-4 -------------------------- 720
and 4 of A8J1 and connect it across
(b) DC voltage chart. the AN/URM-48 output.
Point of measurement Volta (de) to 53.00 mc and the level to 100
millivolts, as indicated by the
SIJ1-2 ------------------------ 10 411A.
Q1 baee ---------------------- 7.2 (12) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/
Q1 emitter --------------------- 7.3 URM-48 and connect it between
(2) After the replacement of a faulty (13) Adjust T3 for a peak indication on
part, perform the alignment proce- the 411A.
dures outlined in d and e below and (14) Change the AN/URM-48 frequency
repeat a and b above. and the receiver-transmitter tun-
d. Preparation for Alignment. ing knobs to 75.95 mc.
(1) Set the receiver-transmitter front (15) Adjust C9 for a peak indication on
panel controls as follows: the 411A.
(a) BAND switch at 30-52. (16) Repeat the procedures given in (9)
(b) Function switch at ON. through (15) above until the 411A
(2) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT indication cannot be increased by
connector J2. tuning.
(3) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO (17) Replace A9.
connector.
(4) Remove module A9. 78. Isolating Trouble in Module A9
(5) Connect the AN/URM-48, between (fig. 10 and 61)
pins 1 and 2 of A8J1. a. Preparation.
e. Alignment Procedure. (1) Prepare the foIlowing equipment:
(1) Set the receiver-transmitter tun- (a) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26.
ing knobs to 30.00 mc. (b) RF Millivoltmeter 411A.
(2) Connect the 411A across the output (c) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
of the AN/URM-48. Press the (d) Hand set H-138/U.
push-to-talk switch. (2) Connect the AN/USM-26 input to
(3) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency test point A14J2.
120
Connect the ME-26B/U to A9J3. mc tuning knob through the 30.50

Connect the 411A to A9J4. to 52.50 mc tuning range. A normal
Set the receiver-transmitter front rf level indicated by the 411A is
panel controls as follows: 0.060 volt ±3 db.
(a) BAND switch at 30-52. (6) Disconnect the 411A from A5J2 and
(b) Tuning knobs for 30.50 mc. connect it to A14J2. Check the in-
(c) Function switch at ON. jection level into A14 while rotating
b. Vfo Frequency Test. the mc tuning knob through the
(1) While - rotating the mc tuning knob 30.50 to 52.50 mc tuning range. A
in 1-mc increments from 30.50 to normal rf level indicated by the
52.50 mc, observe the indications 411A is 0.40 volt ±1.5 db.
on the ME-26B/U, the AN/USM-26, (7) Disconnect the 411A from A14J2
and the 411A. and connect it to A8J2. Connect the
(2) A normal apc voltage indicated H-138/U to AUDIO connector
throughout the tuning range by the and press the push-to-talk switch.
ME-26B/U is +3.6 volts dc ±0.5. Check the injection level into A8
(3) Normal frequency indications ob- while rotating the mc tuning knob
tained on the AN/USM-26 when tun- through the 30.50 to 52.50 mc tun-
ing through the 30.50- to 52.50-mc ing range. A normal indication on
range are 42.000 mc ±2 kc to 64.000 the 411A is 1.3 volts ±2 db.
mc ±2 kc. Each point of observation (8) Remove module A14. Disconnect
should differ by 1 mc ±25 cps. the 411A from A8J2 and connect it
(4) A normal vfo rf output level indica- to pin A of J20 (receptacle for A14).
ted throughout the tuning range by Check the rf signal level while ro-
the 411A is 0.40 volt ±1.5 db. tating the mc tuning knob through
(5) Disconnect the 411A from A9J4 and the 30.50 to 52.50 mc tuning range.
connect it to A5J2. Check the injec- A normal indication on the 411A is
tion level into A5 while rotating the 0.60 volt ±2 db.
121
(9) Disconnect the 411A from J20. Re- mc (AN/USM-26 indicates 43.000
place A14. Connect the 411A to mc ±25 kc).
A9J4. (5) Adjust the 721A output voltage
(10) S e t t h e r e c e i v e r - t r a n s m i t t e r until the ME-26B/U indicates ex-
BAND switch to 53-75. actly +4.0 volts dc. Record the fre-
(11) While rotating the receiver-trans- quency indicated by the AN/USM-
mitter mc tuning knob in l-mc in-
crements from 53.50 to 75.50 mc, (6) Adjust the 721A output voltage until
observe the indications on the ME- the ME-26B/U indicates exactly
26B/U and the 411A. +3.0 volts dc. Record the frequency
(12) The ME-26B/U indication should indicated by the AN/USM-26.
be the same as that in (2) above; (7) Subtract the indication obtained in
the 411A indication should be the (6) above from that obtained in (5)
same as that in (4) above. above. This value, which is the vfo
(13) If any of the indications obtained sensitivity (kc/volt), at the lower
above are not normal, proceed to end of the band, should be 300 kc
the alignment procedure given in ±30.
c and d below. (8) Reset the mc tuning knob to 51.50
c. Preparation for Alignment. mc and the 721A output (indicated
by the ME-26B/U) to +3.6 volts dc.
(1) Prepare the following equipment:
The AN/USM-26 should indicate
(a) Transistor Power Supply 721A.
63.000 mc ±25 kc.
(b) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26. (9) Adjust the 721A output voltage until
(c) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
the ME-26B/U indicates exactly
(d) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A.
+4.0 volts dc. Record the frequency
(2) Connect the positive lead of the
indicated by the AN/USM-26.
721A to A9J3. Connect the GRD lead
(10) Adjust the 721A output voltage until
to the receiver-transmitter chas-
sis.
+3.0 volts dc. Record the frequency
(3) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT
indicated by the AN/USM-26.
connector J2.
(11) Subtract the indication obtained in
(4) Connect the ME-26B/U across the
(10) above from that obtained in
721A output. Adjust the 721A until
(9) above. This value, which is the
vfo sensitivity at the upper end of
3.6 volts dc.
the band, should be equal to the
(5) Connect the AN/USM-26 ,to A14J2.
indication obtained in (7) above
(6) Set the receiver-transmitter front
within ±15 kc.
panel controls as follows:
(12) Reset the 721A output voltage to
exactly -3.6 volts dc as indicated
(b) Mc and kc tuning knobs for 30.50
by the ME-26B/U.
mc.
(13) If the indications obtained in the
procedures given in (7) and (11)
d. Alignment Procedure. above are within limits, proceed to
(1) Rotate the mc tuning knob to 31.50 (17) below. If the indications are
mc. Adjust T1 until the AN/USM-26 greater than ±15 kc apart, proceed
indicates 43.000 mc ±25 kc. to (14) below.
(2) Rotate the mc tuning knob to 51.50 (14) If the frequency difference given in
mc. Adjust C9 until AN/USM-26 (11) above is less than that given
indicates 63.000 mc ±25 kc. in (7) above, adjust C8 clockwise
(3) Repeat the procedure given in (1) until the vfo frequency is decreased
and (2) above until no further ad- 50 kc, as indicated by the AN/USM-
justment is necessary. 26. Adjust C9 counterclockwise un-
(4) Reset the mc tuning knob to 31.50 til the vfo frequency is increased
122
50 kc, as indicated by the AN/USM- Note: Measure all voltages to ground.
26.
(15) If the frequency difference given Point of measurement Volts (de)
in (11) above is greater than that

given in (7) above, adjust C8 coun- Q1 base ------------------------ 7.5
terclockwise until the vfo fre- Q1 collector -------------------- o
Q1 emitter --------------------- 7.’7
quency is increased by 50 kc, as Q2 bSS# --;-------------------- 6.0
indicated by the AN/USM-26. Ad- Q2 colkctof ----------------- 0
just C9 clockwise until the vfo fre- Q2 emitter -------------------- 6.0
Q3 bsse ------------------------ 5.8
quency is returned to its nominal Q3 collector -------------------- o
value, 63.000 mc, as indicated by Q3 emitter --------------------- 7.6
the AN/USM-26. aFor this measurement connect a jumper wire between pins 5 and 6
(16) Repeat the procedures given in (1) of connector J6 (receptacle for module A8) and press tbe push-to-talk
switxh.
through (11) above. If necessary,
repeat the procedure given in (14) (4) After the replacement of a faulty
or (15) above and the entire align- part, replace the module cover and
ment procedure until the results perform the alignment procedures
obtained in the procedures given in given in d above.
(7) and (11) above are within the
prescribed limits. 79. Isolating Trouble in Module A10
(17) Reduce the 721A output to zero and
(fig. 19 and 62)
disconnect it from A9J3. (Allow the
ME-26B/U to remain connected to a. Preparation.
A9J3.) (1) Prepare the following equipment:
(18) Press switches S2 and S3 (fig. 31) (a) Frequency Meter, AN/USM-26.
and note the apc closed-loop volt- (b) Voltmeter, Meter ME-30A/U.
age as indicated by the ME-26B/U. (c) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A.
A normal indication is +3.6 volts (d) Handset H-138/U.
dc ±0.2. (e) Resistor, 470-ohm, 1-watt.
(19) Release S2 and S3. Rotate the mc (f) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
tuning knob from 30.50 mc to 52.50 (g) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A.
mc in 1-mc steps and record the (2) Set the receiver-transmitter front
apc voltage (indicated by the ME- panel controls as follows:
26B/U) at each step. The normal (a) BAND switch at 30-52.
voltage deviation, relative to the (b) Tuning knobs for 30.00 mc.
indication obtained in the proce- (c) Function switch at ON.
dure given in (18) above, is approx- (3) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT
imately ±0.5 volt. connector J2.
(20) If the indications obtained above b. 100-KC Interval Oscillator Test.
are not normal, proceed to e (1) Connect the AN/USM-26, in series
below. with the 470-ohm resistor, between
(21) If the indications obtained above test point A10J2 and ground. The
are normal, alignment procedures AN/USM-26 should indicate 46.850
for A9 are completed. mc.
e. Faulty Part Isolation. (2) Connect the 411A between A10J2
(1) Remove modules A8 and A20. and ground. The 411A should indi-
(2) Apply an 11.5-mc, 0.68 -voltsignal cate 0.2 volt.
between pin 1 of A9J1 and chassis (3) Set the receiver-transmitter tun-
wound. ing knobs for 30.10 mc. The AN/
(3) Use an ME-26B/U to measure dc USM-26 should indicate 46.950 mc;
voltages at the points listed in the the 411A should indicate 0.2 volt.
chart below. Compare them with (4) Set the tuning knobs for 30.20 mc.
the typical voltages listed. The AN/USM-26 should indicate
123
47.050; the 411A should indicate (11) Set the tuning knobs for 30.90 mc.
0.2 volt. The AN/USM-26 should indicate
(5) Set the tuning knobs for 30.30 mc. 47.750 mc; the 411A should indicate
The AN/USM-26 should indicate 0.2 volt.
47.150 mc; the 411A should indicate c. 50-Kc Interval Oscillator Test.
0.2 volt. (1) Remove the cover from A10;
(6) Set the tuning knobs for 30.40 me. remove modules A11, A12, and
The AN/USM-26 should indicate A17.
47.250 mc; the 411A should indicate (2) Set the BAND switch on the re-
0.2 volt. ceiver-transmitter at 30-52 mc,
(7) Set the tuning knobs for 30.50 mco and set the tuning knobs for 30.00
The AN/USM-26 should indicate mc.
47.350 mc; the 411A should indicate (3) Connect a jumper between pins C
0.2 volt. and D of connector J13 (receptacle
(8) Set the tuning knobs for 30.60 mc. for A17).
The AN/USM-26 should indicate (4) Connect the AN/USM-26 between
47.450 mc; the 411A should indicate test point A10J3 and ground. The
0.2 volt. AN/USM-26 should indicate 5.6500
(9) Set the tuning knobs for 30.70 mc. mc.
The AN/USM-26 should indicate (5) Disconnect the AN/USM-26 from
47.550 mc; the 411A should indicate A10J3 and connect the 411A be-
0.2 volt. tween A10J3 and ground. The 411A
(10) Set the tuning knobs for 30.80 mc. should indicate 1.8 volts rms.
The AN/USM-26 should indicate (6) Set the tuning knobs for 30.05 mc.
47.650 mc; the 411A should indicate The 411A should indicate 1.8 volts
0.2 volt. rms. Disconnect the 411A from
124
A10J3 ana reconnect the AN/USM- cedure given in e, f, and g below,
26. The AN/USM-26 should indi- and repeat the procedures given in
cate 5.6000 mc. a, b, and c above.
(7) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO (3) Replace A11, A12, and A17. Re-
connector and press the push-to- place the cover on A10.
talk switch. The AN/USM-26 e. Preparation for Alignment.
should indicate 5.5500 mc. (1) Prepare the AN/USM-26 and the
(8) Set the tuning knobs for 30.00 mc 411A.
and press the push-to-talk switch. (2) Set the receiver-transmitter con-
The AN/USM-26 should indicate trols as follows:
5.6000 mc. (a) BAND switch to 30-52.
(9) Disconnect the AN/USM-26 from (b) Function switch to ON.
A10J3 and reconnect the 411A. f. 100-KC Interval Oscillator Alignment.
Press the push-to-talk switch. The (1) Set the receiver-transmitter tun-
411A should indicate 1.8 volts rms. ing knobs to 30.50 mc.
(10) Set the tuning knobs for 30.05 mc (2) Connect the AN/USM-26, in series
and press the push-to-talk switch. with the 470-ohm resistor, to
The 411A should indicate 1.8 volts A10J2.
rms. (3) Adjust T1 until the AN/USM-26
d. Faulty Parts Isolation. indicates 47.350 mc.
(1) Set the tuning knobs for 30.00 mc. g. 50-Kc Interval Oscillator Alignment.
-
Measure the voltages at the points ( 1 ) Remove the cover from A10. Re-
outlined below. Compare them with move A11, A12, A17, A18 fromthe
the normal signal and dc voltages mother-board.
listed. (2) Set the tuning knobs to 30.05 mc.
Note: Measure all voltages to ground. (3) Connect a jumper between pins C
(a) Signal voltage chart. and D of connector J13 (receptacle
for A17).
(4) Connect the AN/USM-26 to A10J3.
I Voltage (rms)
(5) Adjust T2 until the AN/USM-26

Q1 bee ------------------------ 0.3 indicates 5.6000 mc.
Q1 collector -------------------- 5.0 (6) Disconnect the AN/USM-26 and
Q2 emitter —------------------- 0.3 connect the 411A to A10J3.
Q2 bsse ----------------------- 0.4
R5-CR1 junction (in receive) ----- 5.1 (7) Adjust T3 for peak indication on
(in transmit) ---- 1.5 the 411A.
R7-CR2 junction (in receive) ----- 0.0 (8) Replace modules A11, A12, A17
(in transmit) ---- 5.1
Q2 collector -------------------- 4.6 and A18.
Q3 base ------------------------ 0.3
Q3 collector ------------------- 5.0 80. Isolating Trouble in Module A11
(b) Dc voltage chart. (fig. 24 and 63)
a. Preparation.
Point of measurement Volts (de) (1) Prepare the following equipment:
(a) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26.
Q1 base ----------------------- 7.0 (b) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A.
Q1 collector ------------------- 0.0 (c) Signal Generator AN/URM-48.
Q1 emitter -------------------- 7.2
Q2 base -----------------------
(d) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
8.0
Q2 collector ------------------- 2.5 (e) Module extender.
Q2 emitter --------------------- 8.2 (2) Remove A11. Insert the module
Q3 bsse -—-------------------- 7.0
Q3 collector ------------------- 0.0 extender into the receptacle for
Q3 emitter --------------------- 7.2 A11. Remove the cover from A11
and plug A11 into the module ex-
(2) After the replacement of a faulty tender. Remove A12 from the
part, perform the alignment pro- mother board.
125
(3) Turn the receiver-transmitter (b) DC voltage chart.

function switch to ON.
b. Dc output Level Test. Point of measurement Voltage (de)

A18J2 and chassis ground. Connect J1 PiIl D ----------------------- 10.0
the AN/USM-26 and the 411A Q1 base ----------------------- 8.0
Q1 collector ------------------- 3.0
across the AN/URM-48 output. Q1 emitter --------------------- 8.2
(2) Press S2 (fig. 31) and adjust the J2 ---------------------------- 2.8
AN/URM-48 frequency to the level
to 0.2-volt as indicated by the 411A. (2) After the replacement of a faulty
(3) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/ part, perform the alignment pro-
URM-48 and connect it between pin cedure given in d and e below and
F of A11J1 and ground. repeat the procedures given in a
(4) Connect the ME-26B/U between and b above.
A11J2 and chassis ground. The (3) Replace module A12.
ME-26B/U should indicate +2.8 d. Preparation for Alignment.
volts dc. (1) Set the receiver-transmitter front
c. Faulty Parts Isolation. panel controls as follows:
(1) Apply a 5.6-mc, 0.2-volt signal (a) BAND switch at 30-52.
between A18J2 and chassis ground. (b) Tuning knobs to 30.00 mc.
Measure the voltages at the points (c) Function switch at ON.
outlined in the charts in a a n d (2) Remove A11. Insert the module
b below. Compare them with the extender into the receptacle for
normal signal and dc voltages A11. Plug A11 into the module ex-
listed. tender. Remove module A12.
Note: Measure all voltages to g r o u n d . (3) Connect the output of the AN/URM-
(a) Signal voltage chart. 48 to A18J2. Connect the 411A
across the AN/URM-48 output.
(4) Set the AN/URM-48 output to 6.10
I
1
Voltage (rms)
mc and adjust the output level to
.-— -------------- ---------- 1.3 0.2 volt as indicated by the 411A.
%1 base ------------------------ 0.2 e. Alignment Procedure.
Q1 collector -------------------- 2.8 (1) Connect the ME-26B/U between
QI emitter -------------------- 0.0
A11J2 and chassis ground.
126
(2) Adjust transformer T1 for a maxi- (3) Connect a jumper between pin A
mum dc indication on the ME-26B/ and C of A12J1.
U. (4) Set the front panel controls of the
(3) Set the output of the AN/URM-48 receiver-transmitter as follows:
to 5.20 mc. (a) BAND switch at 30-52.
(4) Adjust transformer T2 for a mini- (b) Tuning knobs to 30.00 mc.
mum indication on the ME-26B/U. (c) Function switch at ON.
(5) Set the output of the AN/URM-48 b. Gain Test.
to 5.60 mc. Adjust T1 until the (1) Connect the AN/URM-25F between
ME-26B/U indicates +2.8 volts dc. pin B of A12J1 and ground. Connect
(6) Replace module A12. the 411A and the AN/USM-26
across the AN/URM-25 output.
81. Isolating Trouble in Module A12 (2) Adjust the AN/URM-25F frequency
(fig. 21 and 64) to 5.60 mc and the output level to
10 millivolts, as indicated by the
a. Preparation. 411A.
(1) Prepare the following equipment: (3) Connect the 411A between A12J2
(a) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A. and ground. The 411A should indi-
(b) R. F. Signal Generator AN/URM- cate approximately 100 millivolts.
25F. (4) If the gain does not meet the stand-
(c) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26. ards of the procedure given above,
(d) Multimeter ME-26B/U. proceed to d below.
(e) Module extender. (5) If the gain meets the standards
(2) Remove A12 and A13. Insert the given above, proceed to c below.
module extender into the recepta- Do not disturb the equipment set-
cle for A12. Plug A12 into the mod- ings.
ule extender. c. Bandwidth Test.
(1) With the AN/URM-25F adjusted as
in a above, note the output level in-
dicated by the 411A.
(2) Adjust the AN/URM-25F frequency
to 5.25 mc and maintain the output
level at 10 millivolts. Note the in-
dication on 411A.
to 6.10 mc and maintain the output
level at 10 millivolts. Note the in-
dication on 411A.
(4) The indication obtained in the pro-
cedure given in (2) and (3) above
should be 6 db less than the re-
sponse indicated in (1) above.
d. Faulty Parts Isolation.
(1) Apply a 5.60 mc, 10-mv signal be-
tween pin B of A12J1 and ground.
Measure the voltages at the points
outlined in the charts in (a) and(b)
below. Compare the normal signals
and the dc voltages listed in the
charts .
Note: Connect a jumper between pins A
and C of A12J1 for the measurements
Figure 63. Module A11, parts location. listed below.
127
(a) Signal voltage chart. (receptacle for A9) and chassis
ground.
Point of measurement Volts (rma ) (2) Connect the AN/USM-26 and the
411A across the AN/URM-48 out-
0.008 put. Adjust the AN/URM-48 fre-
0.0 quency to 46.500 mc as indicated
0.80
---------------------------- 0.10 by the AN/USM-26; set the output
~ level to 3 millivolts as indicated
(b) Dc voltage chart. by the 411A.
(3) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/
Point of measurement Voltage (dc )
URM-48 and connect it between
J1-D --------------------- ----- 10.0 (4) Set the receiver-transmitter tun-
Q1 bsse ------------------------ 4.2 ing knobs to 30.00 mc.
Q1 colleotor ------------------- 0.0
Q1 emitter --------------------- 4.5 (5) Record the voltage level at A18J2
as indicated by the 411A. This level
(2) After the replacement of a faulty should be approximately 40 milli-
part, perform the alignment pro- volts.
dures given in paragraph 86 and (6) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency
repeat the procedures given in a, to 47.400 mc as indicated by the
b, and c above. Replace module AN/USM-26. (Maintain the 3-mil-
A13. Remove the module extender. livot output level.)
e. Preparation for Alignment. (7) Set the receiver-transmitter tun-
(1) Be sure to perform the preparation ing knobs to 30.90 mc.
procedures given in a above. (8) Record the voltage level at A18J2
(2) Connect the AN/URM-25F between as indicated by the 411A.
pin B of A12J1 and chassis ground. (9) If the indication obtained in the
Connect the 411A and the AN/USM-
26 across the AN/URM-25 output.
to 5.60 mc and the output level to
10 millivolts as indicated by the
411A.
(4) Connect the 411A between A12J2
and ground.
f. Alignment Procedure. To align mod-
ule A12, alternately adjust T1, L1, T2,
and L2 for a maximum indication on the
411A.
82. Isolating Trouble in Module A13

(fig. 20 and 65)
a. Preparation.
(a) Signal Genenator AN/URM-48.
(b) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26.
(c) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A.
(2) Turn the receive r-transmitter
b. 53-Mc Filter Test.
(1) Remove module A9 and connect the
AN/TIRM-48 between pin 1 of J6 Figure 64. Module A12, parts location,
128
procedure given in (8) above dif- nector on the mother board. Insert A13
fers from that indicated in (5) above into the module extender. Apply a 10-
by more than 2 db, proceed to the millivolt rf signal of the frequency in-
alignment procedures in c below. dicated in the chart in (1) below and
(10) If the indications obtained in the measure the voltages across the parts
procedure given in (5) and (8) above indicated. Compare them with the normal
are normal, testing of A13 is com- signal levels listed. Press switch S3 for
pleted. these measurements.
c. Faulty Parts Isolation. Insert the Note: Measure all voltages to ground.
module extender (fig. 27) into the A13 con- (1) Signal voltage chart.
Injection
Frequency (me) I Location

I Voltage (mv rms)
51.9 Jl@nsEsndF Across secondsry of T1 ------------ 55

51.2 JIPins Eand F Across T2 ------------------------ 8
50.1 JIPins Esnd F Across L1 ------------------------ 25
46.5 J1 piIIS C sad D Across T3 ------------------------ 7
(2) After the replacement of a faulty to 53.400 mc, as indicated by the

part, repeat the procedures given AN/USM-26.
in a and b above. (12) Set the receiver-transmitter tun-
d. 53-Mc Filter Alignment. ing knobs for 30.90 mc. Record the
(1) Remove module A15. the level at A12J2 as indicated by
(2) Set the receiver-transmitter tun- the 411A.
ing knobs for 30.50 mc. (13) If the levels recorded in (10) and
(3) Connect the 411A across the AN/ (12) are not equal, ±2 db, repeat
URM-48 output. the procedures given in (8) through
(4) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency (12) above while adjusting T1.
to 53.000 mc, as indicated by the
AN/USM-26, and the level to 20
millivolts, as indicated by 411A.
(6) Adjust L1, T2, and T3 for a peak
indication on the 411A. A typical
indication is about 100 millivolts.
(7) Disconnect the 411A from A12J2
and connect it across the AN/URM-
48 output.
to 52.500, as indicated by the AN/
USM-26, and set the level to 20
millivolts, as indicated by the
411A.
(10) Set the receiver-transmitter tun-
ing knobs for 30.00 mc. Record the
level at A12J2 as indicated by the
411A.
(11) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency Figure 65. Module A13, parts location.
129
83. Isolating Trouble in Module A14 (a) Signal voltage chart.
(fig. 17 and 66)
a. Preparation.
(a) Signal Generator AN/URM-48.
(b) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26.
(c) RF Millivoltmeter 411A. (b) Dc voltage chart.
(d) Oscilloscope AN/USM-50A.
Point of measurement Voltage (de)
(e) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
(i) Module extender.
(2) Remove module A9. J1 PiIl B ----------------------- 10.0
Q1 emitter -------------------- 6.2
(3) Turn the receiver-transmitter Q1 bsse ----------------------- 6.0
b. VFO InPut Test. (3) After the replacement of a faulty
(1) Connect the AN/URM-48 between part, perform the alignment pro-
pin 1 of J2 (receptacle for A9) and cedure outlined in e and f below
chassis ground. Connect the 411A and repeat the procedures given in
across the AN/URM-48 output. a, b, and c above. Replace module
(2) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency A9.
to 53 mc and set the level to 10 e. Prepration for Alignment.
millivolts, as indicated by the (1) Set the receiver-transmitter front
411A. panel controls as follows:
(3) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/ (a) BAND switch at 30-52.
URM-48 and connect it between (b) Tuning knobs to 30.50 mc.
A14J2 and chassis ground. (c) Function switch at ON.
(4) Slowly vary the AN/URM-48 fre- (2) Remove module A9.
quency from 41 to 65 mc while ob- f. Alignment Procedures.
serving the 411A. (1) Connect the AN/URM-48 between
(5) The 411A should indicate 25 milli- pin 1 of J6 (receptacle for A9) and
volts ±2 db throughout the 41- to chassis ground. Connect the 411A
65-mc tuned range. across the AN/URM-48 output.
c. 1-Mc Input Test. (2) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency
(1) Connect the AN/USM-26 between to 52 mc and the level to 3 milli-
A14J3 and ground. The frequency volts, as indicated by the 411A.
meter should indicate 1 mc ±25 (3) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/
Cps . URM-48 and connect it between
(2) Connect the AN/USM-50A between A18J2 and chassis ground.
A14J3 and ground. The AN/USM- (4) Record the voltage level at A18J2
50A should indicate 1.5 volts peak- as indicated by the 411A.
to-peak. (5) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency
d. Faulty Parts Isolation. to 54 mc (maintain the output level
(1) Insert the module extender into the at 3 millivolts).
A14 connector and insert A14 into (6) Record the voltage level at A18J2
the module extender. Remove the as indicated by the 411A.
cover from A14. (7) Compare the indications obtained
(2) Apply a 53-mc, 0.01-volt signal in the procedures given in (4) and
between pin A of A14J1 and chassis (6) above. If the indications are
ground. Measure the voltages at equal to each other, alignment of
the points listed below. Compare A14 is accurate. If the indications
them with the normal signal and dc are not equal to each other, pro-
voltages listed. ceed to (8) below.
Note: Measure all voltages to ground. (8) Repeat the procedures given in (1)
130
through (7) above and adjust T2 un- c. Faulty Parts Isolation.
til the indications given in (4) and (1) Insert the module extender into the
(6) above are equal. Perform this A15 connector and insert A15 into
step as required. the module extender.
(9) Replace module A9. (2) Place the function switch on there-
ceiver-tansmitter at ON. Meas -
ure the voltages at the points out-
lined in the charts in (a) and (b)
below. Compare them with the nor-
mal signal and dc voltages listed.
(a) Signal voltage chart.
Point of measurement Voltage (rms)
Q1 base ------------------------ 0.01

Q1 emitter --------------------- 0.5
Q1 collector -------------------- 5.3
Q2 base ------------------------ 1.8
Q2 collector ------------------- 4.3
J1-E --------------------------- 4.3
(b) Dc voltage chart.

I Voltage (de)
J1 I)ti A ------------------------ 10.0

L1 - C6 junction ---------------- 9.8
Q1 base ------------------------ 6.8
Q1 emitter --------------------- 6.8
Q2 base ------------------------ 9.8
Q2 emitter ---------------------- ‘7. 8
Figure 66. Module A14, parts location. (3) After the replacement of a faulty
part, perform alignment proce-
dures given in d and e below and
repeat the procedure given in a and
84. Isolating Trouble in Module A15 b above.
(fig. 18 and 67) d. Alignment Procedure. With A15 ex-
a. Preparation. tended (c(1) above), set the receiver-
transmitter front panel controls as fol-
lows :
(a) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26.
(1) BAND switch at 30-52.
(b) Voltmeter, Meter ME-30A/U.
(2) Tuning knobs to 30.00 mc.
(c) Oscilloscope AN/USM-50A.
(3) Function switch at ON.
(d) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
e. Alignment Procedure.
(e) Module extender.
(1) Connect the AN/USM-26 between
(2) Set the receiver-transmitter front
panel controls as follows:
(a) BAND switch at 30-52. (2) Adjust A15T1 until the AN/USM-26
indicates 1.0000 mc ±25 cps.
(b) Tuning knobs to 30.00 mc.
(c) Function switch at ON. (3) Remove the module extender.
b. Output Frequency and Output Level
Test. Connect the AN/USM-26 between 85. Isolating Trouble in Module A16
(fig. 25 and 68)
A14J3 and chassis ground. The AN/USM-
50A should indicate a minimum of 1.5 volts a. Preparation.
peak-to-peak. (1) Insert the module extender into J11
131
c. Faulty Parts Location.
(1) Connect A16 to a 12-volt, dc-power
source. Measure the voltages at
the points outlined in the chart in
(2) below. Compare them with the
normal dc voltages listed.
(2) Dc voltage chart.
I
I Volts (de)
J1 pill C ----------------------- 12.5

Q1 emitter -------------------- 12.2
Q1 collector ------------------- 9.8
Q1 bsse ----------------------- 12.0
9.8
J1 pill F ----------------------- 9.8
Q2 emitter -------------------- 4. ‘7
Q2 collector ------------------- 12.0
Q2 bsse ------------------—--- 5.3
(3) Remove the module extender.
86. Isolating Trouble in Module A17

(fig. 23 and 69)
Figure 67, Module A15, parts location. a. Preparation.
(a) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
(receptacle for A16) and insert A16
into the module extender.
(2) Prepare Multimeter ME-26B/U.
(b) Tuning knobs to 30.00 mc.
b. Output Voltage Test.
(1) Connect the ME-26B/U between
pins C and D of A16J1, and note the
voltage.
A16J2 and ground. The ME-26B/U
should indicate the same voltage as
that in (1) above.
pins F and D of A16J1. With exactly
+10 volts input, the ME-26B/U
should indicate +9.5 volts dc ±0.5.
With a +15 volts dc input ±0, the
ME-26B/U should indicate +10
volts dc ±0.5.
A16J3 and ground. The ME-26B/U
should provide the same indica-
tions as given in (3) above. Figure 68. Module A 16, parts location.
132
(b) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A. the AN/USM-50A (connected to pin
(c) Oscilloscope AN/USM-50A. F of A17J1) .
(d) R. F. Signal Generator AN/URM- (3) Repeat the procedures given in b
25F. above.
(e) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26. d. Faulty Part Isolation.
(f) Module extender. (1) Set the AN/URM-25F frequency to
(2) Insert the module extender into J13 5.6 mc, and the level to 0.1 volt
(receptacle for A17). Insert A17 rms at A18J2.
into the module extender. (2) Measure the voltages at the points
(3) Set the AN/URM-25F output signal listed in the charts below. Compare
frequency to 5.6 mc. them with the normal signal and dc
(4) Connect the AN/URM-25F between voltages listed.
A18J2 and chassis ground. Note: Measure all voltages to ground,
(5) Connect the 411A between pin B of with S2 (fig. 31) pressed during th. test.
A17J1 and ground. (a) Signal voltage chart.
pin F of A17J1 and ground.
(7) Set the receiver-transmitter func-
I V01L9 (rms)
tion switch to ON, and the tuning Q1 base --------------— ------- 0.088
knobs to 30.05 mc. Q1 emitter -------------------- 0
Q1 collector ------------------- 4.8
(8) Remove module A12.
b. Bandwidth Test, (b) DC voltage chart.
(1) Adjust the AN/URM-25F for a 0.2-
volt rms indication on the 411A. Point of measurement Volts (rms)
(2) Note the voltage at pin F of A17J1, I
indicated by the ME-26B/U. Nor-

J1-A -------------------------- 10
mal voltage indication is 3.8 volts Q1 hsse ------------------------ 7.7
dc. Q1 emitter -------------------- 8.0
Q1 collector ------------------- 0
(3) Connect the AN/USM-26 across the CR1-C3 junction -------------.- 6.6
AN/URM-25F output and adjust the CR2-C4 junction --------------- 1.3
AN/URM-25F frequency to 5.6000
mc as indicated by the AN/USM- (3) After replacing a faulty part, re-
26. peat the procedures given in b and
(4) Connect the AN/USM-50A to A17J2. c above.
(5) Connect the 411A across the AN/
URM-25F output.
87. Isolating Troubles in Module A18
(6) Adjust the AN/URM-25F signal
(fig. 22 and 70)
level to 0.1 volt as indicated by the
411A and note the indication ob- a. Preparation.
tained on the AN/USM-50A. (1) Prepare the following equipment:
(7) The normal peak-to-peak indica- (a) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A.
tion displayed on the AN/USM-50A (b) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26.
should exceed 4.5 volts. (c) R.F. Signal Generator AN/URM-
(8) If the test results are not normal, 25F.
proceed to c below. (Do not disturb (d) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
the test equipment settings.) (e) Module extender.
c. Alignment. (2) Remove modules A10, A12, and
(1) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/ A18.
URM-25F. Use the 411A to meas- (3) Insert the module extender into J14
ure signal level between A10J3 and (receptacle for A18) and insert A18
chassis ground. A normal indica- into the module extender.
tion is 1.8 volts rms. (4) Turn the receiver-transmitter
(2) Adjust T1 for a peak indication on function switch to ON.
133
(2) Adjust the AN/URM-25F signal
level to 1.5 millivolts, as indicated
by the 411A.
URM-25F and connect it between
to 5.3000 mc as indicated by the
AN/USM-26. Normal 411A indica-
tion at A18J2 should be 0.07 volt
rms.
to 5.9000 mc as indicated by the
AN/USM-26. Normal 411A indica-
tion at A18J2 should be 0.07 volt
rms.
(6) If the indications obtained in the
procedures given in (4) and (5)
above are not normal, proceed to
d below. (Do not disturb test equip-
ment settings.)
(7) If the indications obtained in (4) and
(5) above are normal, the A18 test-
ing is completed.
Figure 69. Module A17, parts location
d. Alignment Procedure.
(1) Connect the 411A across the AN/
URM-25F output.
b. Gain Test. (2) Adjust the AN/URM-25F frequency
(1) Connect the AN/URM-25F be- to 5.6000 mc as indicated by the
tween pin F of A18J1 and ground. AN/USM-26 and the level to 1.5
Connect the 411A and the AN/ millivolts, as indicated by the
URM-26 across the AN/URM- 411A.
25F output. (3) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/
(2) Adjust the AN/URM-25F frequency URM-25 F and connect it between
to 5.6000 mc as indicated by the A18J2 and chassis ground.
AN/USM-26 and the level to 4 mil- (4) Adjust L1, T1, L2, and T2 for peak
livolts, as indicated by the 411A, indication on the 411A.
(3) Disconnect the 411A from the AN/ (5) Repeat the procedure given inb and
URM-25F and connect it between c above.
A18J2 and chassis ground. e. Faulty Parts Isolation.
(4) A normal output signal voltage at (1) Set the AN/URM-25F output fre-
A18J2 is 0.1 volt rms, as indicated quency to 5.600 mc as indicated
by the 411A. by the AN/USM-26 and adjust
(5) If a proper indication is not ob- the voltage level between pin F
tained, proceed to d below. (Do not of A18J1 and chassis ground to
disturb the test equipment set- 2 millivolts as indicated by the
tings.) 411A.
(6) If the proper indication is obtained, (2) Measure the voltages at the points
proceed to c below. (Do not disturb listed in the charts given in (a) and
the test equipment settings.) (b) below. Compare these with the
c. Bandwidth Test. normal signal and dc voltages
(1) Connect the 411A across the AN/ listed.
URM-25F output. Note: Measure all voltages to ground.
134
Point of measurement Volta (rms)
Q1 base -------------------—--- 0.002

Ql emitter ---— ---------------- 0
Ql collector -------------------- 0.200
Q2 base -——------------------ 0.0025
Q2 emitter--— ------------------ 0.0037
Q200Wctor --------------------- 1.4
J2 ---------—------------—--- 0.095
(b) Dc voltage chart.
I Volts (de)
Qlbase ----------------------- 5.0

Ql emitter --------------------- 5.2
Ql collector ------------------- 0
Q2bsse --------------------- 5.0
Q2 emitter ------— ------------- 5.2
Q2collector ------------------- 0
R1-R9junction ----------------- 8.0
(3) After replacing a faulty part, re-

peat all procedures given above.
(4) Replace modules A10 and A12.
Remove the module extender. Figure 70. Module A18, parts location.
88. Isolating Troubles in Module A19 (3) Connect the 411A to A20J2.
(fig. 9 and 71)
(4) Depress and hold the push-to-talk
a. Preparation. switch. Observe the 411A and the
(1) Prepare the following equipment: AN/USM-26.
(a) Audio Oscillator TS-382F/U. (5) The output level, indicated by the
(b) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26. 411A, should be 650 millivolts.
(c) Meter, Modulation ME-57/U. (6) The output frequency, indicated by
(d) Voltmeter, Meter ME-30A/U. the AN/USM-26, should be 11.4485
(e) Spectrum Analyzer TS-723A/U. mc ±300 cps.
(f) Multimeter ME-26B/U. (7) Release the push-to-talk switch.
(g) Oscilloscope AN/USM-50A. (8) Disconnect the AN/USM-26 from
(h) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A. A20J2. Connect the ME-57/U be-
(i) Adapter UG-274B/U. tween A20J2 and chassis ground.
(j) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A. (9) Press the push-to-talk switch. Ob-
(k) Module extender. serve the indication on the ME-57/
(2) Remove A19. U. Deviation indicated by the
(3) Insert themodule extender into J15 ME-57/U should be 3 kc ±0.5 kc.
(receptacle for A19) and insert A19 Release the push-to-talk switch.
into the module extender. (lo) Change the receiver-transmitter
(4) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT BAND switch from 30-52 to 53-75.
connector J2. (11) Press the push-to-talk switch and
b. Level and Frequency Test. observe the 411A and the ME-57/U.
(1) Connect the AN/USM-26 between (12) The 411A should indicate 650 mil-
A20J2 and chassis ground. livolts; the ME-57/U should indi-
(2) Turn the receiver-transmitter cate a deviation of 3 kc +0.5.
function switch at ON, and set the (13) Release the push-to-talk switch.
BAND switch at 30-52. (14) Disconnect the ME-57/U from
135
A20J2 and connect the AN/USM-26 through (12) above as required. Re-
to that point. lease the push-to-talk switch.
(15) Press the push-to-talk switch. (14) Change the receiver-transmitter
(16) The AN/USM-26 should indicate BAND switch from 30-52 to 53-75.
11.5485 mc ±300 cps. (15) Press and hold the push-to-talk
(17) Release the push-to-talk switch. switch. Repeat the procedures
(18) If the indications obtained in the given in (8) above if required.
procedure given in (5), (6), (9), (16) Adjust C1 for a minimum indication
(120), and (16) above are not nor- on the ME-57/U.
mal, proceed to the alignment (17) Adjust C2 until the AN/USM-26 in-
procedures in c below. (Do not dis - dicates 11.5485 mc ±300 cps.
turb equipment settings or con- (18) Adjust L1 until the ME-57/U indi-
nections.) cates a 10 kc ±2 deviation.
(19) If the indications obtained above (19) Readjust C1 to obtain a minimum
are normal, the A19 testing is com- distortion indication on the TS-
pleted. 723A/U.
c. Alignment Procedure. (20) Repeat the procedures given in (17)
(1) Remove module A23. through (20) above as required. Re-
(2) Connect the TS-382F/U between lease the push-to-talk switch.
pin D of an AUDIO connector and d. Faulty Part Isolation.
ground. Connect the ME-30A/U (1) Remove module A19.
across the TS-382 F/U output. (2) Make resistance checks, using the
(3) Adjust the TS-382F/U frequency to ME-26B/U, between the pins of J1
1 kc and the level to 1.4 millivolts, on A19 listed in the chart below:
as indicated by the ME-30A/U.
(4) Connect the ME-57/U across the Point of me~urement ohms
AN/USM-26 input through a UG- I
274B/U.
(5) Connect the TS-723A/U to the
AUDIO OUTPUT connector of the
ME-57/U.
(6) Connect the AN/USM-50A between
A22J3 and chassis ground. (3) Check crystals A19Y1 and A19Y2
(7) Turn the receiver-transmitter by substitution.
BAND switch to 30-52. Press and (4) After replacing a faulty part, re-
hold the push-to-talk switch. place module A19 and repeat the
(8) Adjust the output level of the TS- procedures given in b and c above.
382 F/U to obtain a 5-volt peak-to- Replace module A23,
peak presentation on the AN/USM-
50A. If clipping is observed, slowly
decrease the TS-382F/U output
level until the wave becomes sinus- (fig. 8 and 72)
oidal. a. Preparation.
(9) Adjust C4 for a minimum indication (1) Prepare the following equipment:
on the ME-57/U. (a) Audio Oscillator TS-382F/U.
(10) Adjust C5 until the AN/USM-26 in- (b) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26.
dicates 11.4485 mc ±300 cps. (c) Meter, Modulation ME-57/U.
(11) Adjust L2 until the ME-57/U indi- (d) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A.
cates a 10 kc ±2 deviation. (e) Voltmeter, Meter ME-30A/U.
(12) Readjust C4 to obtain a maximum (f) Oscilloscope AN/USM-50A.
distortion indication on the TS- (g) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A.
723A/U. (h) Module extender.
(13) Repeat the procedures given in (10) (2) Re move modules A20 and A23.
136
ground. Connect the ME-30A/U
across the TS-382F/U output.
(2) Adjust the TS-382F/U frequency to
1 kc and the level to 1.4 millivolts,
as indicated by the ME-30A/U.
(3) Connect the ME-57/U to A20J2.
(4) Press the push-to-talk switch and
repeat the procedure given in (2)
above.
(5) The ME-57/U should indicate a
deviation of 10 kc ±2.
(6) Release the push-to-talk switch.
(7) If the deviation given in (5) above
is not obtained, proceed to ebelow.
d. Alignment Procedures.
(1) T-urn the receiver-transmitter
BAND switch to 30-52.
(2) Press the push-to-talk switch.
(3) Connect the AN/USM-26 and the
411A between A20J2 and chassis
ground; adjust T1 for 11.451 mc
±500 cps.
(4) Adjust T2 for a peak indication on
the 411A.
(5) Release the push-to-talk switch.
(6) If the indications given in (3) and
Place the alignment cover (fig. 28) (4) are not obtained, proceed to e
on A20. below. If they are obtained, repeat
(3) Insert themoduleextender into J16 c above.
(receptacle for A20). Insert A20 e. Faulty Part Isolation.
into the module extender. (1) Press the push-to-talk switch.
(4) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT (2) Set the TS-382F/U frequency to 1
connector J2. kc and the level to 1.4 millivolts.
b. Frequency Accuracy Test. Connect TS-382F/U between pin
(1) Set the receiver-transmitter D of an AUDIO connector and
BAND switch at 30-52, and the ground.
function switch at ON. (3) Measure the voltages at the points
(2) Connect the 411A and the AN/USM- listed in the charts in (a) and (b)
26 to A20J2. below. Compare them with the
(3) Press the push-to-talk switch. normal signal and dc voltages
(4) The AN/USM-26 should indicate listed.
11.451 mc ±500 cps, and the 411A Note: Measure all voltages to ground.
should indicate 0.68 volt rms. (a) Signal voltage chart.
(5) Turn the BAND switch to 53-75.
The AN/USM-26 should indicate Point of measurement VOlrE (rms)
11.551 mc ±500 cps, and the 411A

should indicate 0.68 volt rms. Q1 bsse ------—------—------— 1.8
(6) If the frequencies given in (4) and Q1 emitter --------— ----— ----- 1.85
(5) above cannot be obtained, pro-
Q1 collector -------------——--- 0
CR1-C4 junction ------— -------- 2.8
ceed to d below. Q2 base ------—---------— ----- 0.2
c. Frequency Deviation Test. Q2 emitter ---------------—----- 0
Q2 collector ----—--—---— ----- 1.8
(1) Connect the TS-382F/U between J2 ---------- —------ ---------- 0.88
pin D of an AUDIO connector and
137
(b) DC voltage chart. (f) Handset H-138/U.
(g) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A.
Point of measurement Volts (de) (h) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
(2) Remove module A5.
Q1 tW3~ ------------------- 5.9 (3) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO
Q1 emitter -------—--— ------- 5.7 connector.
Q1 collector ---------------—-- 0
CR1-C4 junction --------------- 4.8 (4) Set the receiver-transmitter
Q2 base ----~--------—----—- 4.7 function switch at ON.
R8-R7 junction --------------- 4.0 peak- (5) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT
to-peak
connector J2.
a}lake this measurement with the .W,’USW50.A. (6) Connect the AN/URM-48 output to
the AN/USM-26. Adjust the AN/
(4) After replacing a faulty part, re- URM-48 frequency to 11.500
peat the procedures given in b, c, mc, as indicated by the AN/USM-
and d above. 26.
(5) Replace module A23. Remove the (7) Disconnect the AN/URM-48 from
module extender. the AN/USM-26 and connect it be-
tween pins C and D of J9 (receptacle
90. Isolating Trouble in Module A21 for A5).
(fig. 85 and 73) (8) Frequency modulate the AN/URM-
48 with a 1,000-cps sinusoidal sig-
a. Preparation. nal at a deviation of ±10 kc peak.
(1) Prepare the following equipment: b. Gain Test.
(a) Signal Generator AN/URM-48. (1) Connect the 411A across the output
(b) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26. of the AN/URM-48.
(c) Voltmeter, Meter ME-30A/U. (2) Adjust the level of the AN/URM-
(d) Rf Millivoltmeter 411A. 48 to obtain a l-millivolt indication
(e) Spectrum Analyzer TS-723A/U. on the 411A.
(3) Connect the ME-26/U between
A25J4 and ground.
(4) Adjust the receiver-transmitter
VOLUME control to obtain a 1.0-
volt indication on the ME-26/U.
(5) Connect the ME-30A/U between
A25J3 and ground. The ME-30A/U
should indicate between 180 and
360 millivolts. Record the voltage.
(6) Decrease the AN/URM-48 level
until the ME-30A/U indication de-
creases 3 db from the level noted
in (5) above.
(7) The AN/URM-48 output 1 e v e 1
across pins C and D of J9 should
be between 2.5 and 5.0 microvolt
rms.
(8) If the results given in (1) through
(7) above are not obtained, proceed
toe below.
c. Bandwidth Test.
(1) Repeat the procedures given in a(1)
through (8) above.
(2) Connect the 411A between the case
Figure 72. Module A20, parts location. of Q4 and ground.
138
(3) Adjust the output of the AN/URM- above is the 60-db bandwidth and
48 until the voltage indicated on the should not exceed 100 kc.
411A is 100 millivolts. Record the (19) If the 60-db bandwidth is not as de-
AN/URM-48 setting, which should scribed, proceed to e below.
be about 20 microvolt. d. Alignment Procedure.
(4) Increase the AN/URM-48 output 6 (1) Repeat the procedures given in a (1)
db above that noted in (3) above. through (9) above.
(5) Increase the AN/URM-48 fre- (2) Set the VOLUME control on the re-
quency until the voltage indicated ceiver-transmitter fully counter-
by the 411A is 100 millivolts. clockwise.
(6) Connect the AN/URM-48 to the AN/ (3) Adjust the AN/URM-48 output volt-
USM-26. Record the frequency in- age to 2.5 microvolt between pins
dicated by the AN/USM-26. C and D of J9.
(7) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency (4) Tune T1 and T2 for a maximum in-
to 11.500 mc and the level to that dication on the ME-30A/U.
noted in (4) above between pins C (5) Adjust the VOLUME control on the
and D of J9. receiver-transmitter to produce
(8) Decrease the AN/URM-48 fre- not more than 1 volt of audio signal
quency until the voltage indicated as indicated by the ME-26 B/U
by the 411A is 100 millivolts. (connected between A25J4 and
(9) Connect the AN/URM-48 to the AN/ ground) .
US M-26. Record the frequency in- (6) Connect the TS-723A/U between
dicated by the AN/USM-26. A25J4 and chassis ground.
(lo) The difference between the fre- (7) Tune L4 and T2 for a minimum
quencies noted in (6) and (9) above 1,000-cycle distortion as indicated
is the 6-db bandwidth and should not by the TS-723A/U.
be less than 32 kc. (8) Repeat the procedures given in (4)
(11) If the 6-db bandwidth is not as de- through (7) above until the audio
scribed above, proceed to e below. output, indicated by the ME-20A/U,
(12) Adjust the frequency of the AN/ cannot be increased by tuning.
URM-48 to 11.500 mc and the out- (9) Replace A5.
put voltage to 60 db above the level e. Faulty Parts Isolation.
noted in (3) above across pins C and (1) Remove A5.
D of J9. (2) With the AN/URM-48 set to 11.50
(13) Increase the AN/URM-48 fre- mc, adjust the output level at J9,
quency until the voltage indicated pins C and D, as indicated in the
by the 411A is 100 millivolts. chart in (a) below.
(14) Connect the AN/URM-48 to the AN/ (3) Measure the voltages at the points
USM-26. Record the frequency in- listed in the charts in (a) and (b)
dicated by the AN/USM-26. below. Compare them with the nor-
(15) Adjust the AN/URM-48 frequency mal signal and dc voltage listed.
to 11.500 mc and the output volt- Note: Measure all voltages tO ground.
age to 60 db above the level noted (a) Signal voltage chart.
in (3) above across pins C and D of
J9. Point of measurement
I
Millivolts (rw)
(16) Decrease the AN/URM-48 fre-

quency until the voltage indicated Q1 collqftora ------—----—-— 185
by the 411A is 100 millivolts. Q1 base .-- —-- -------— ----- 22
Q2 collectors ------—-- ------- 630
(17) Connect the AN/URM-48 to the AN/ Q2 basea -;---——---------—- 185
USM-26. Record the frequency in- Q2 emitter ~--—--—-------—---- 17
dicated by the AN/USM-26. Q3 oollector ----------------- 120
Q3 beeb ----------------------- 4.6
(18) The difference between the fre- 64 odktd ------.----—-.-- 400
quencies noted in (14) and (17) Q4 baseb --------------- 54
139
Point of mewurement Millivolta (rms)
Q5 colleotoro ---------------- 160

Q5 baeeo ------------------- 49
Q6collecto@ ------------------- 1.65
volts
Q6 ksec ---------------------- 150
aMake this meamrement with the ANAJRM-48 output adjusted to
80 millivolts.
bMake tbie ~e~urement with tbe AN/URM-48 output adjusted tO
100 micr0v01t8.
cMake this measurement with the AN/URM-48 output adjusted to
5 miorovok
(b) DC voltage chart.
Point of measurement Volta (de)
Q1 oolleotor --------------- 1.2

Q1 bese ---— ------------ 3.0
Q1 ezdtter ----------------
Q2 colleotor ----------------- ;:
Q2 bsae ---------------------- 4.6
Q2 emitter-----— ----------- 4.9
Q34!OlleOt02’ ------— ------- 0
Q3 ttese —------------------ 3.8
Q3 emitter ------------------- 4.2
Q4 ookXor —------------ 0.8
Q4 base -------------..-_----- 2.9
Q4 emitter ------------------ 3*3
~ :~emtor -------------- Lo
.—-----------.---- 2*7
Q5 emitter ---------------- 3.0
Q6 colleotor ----------------- 0
GM bsse —---------------- 3.7
W emitter ------------------ 3.85
(4) After replacing a faulty part, re-
peat the procedures given in
d above.
(fig. 6 and 74)
(b) Tuning knobs for 30.00 mc.
a. Preparation. (c) Function switch at ON.
(1) Prepare the following test equip- b. Speech Amplifier Limiter Distortion
ment: Test.
(a) Audio Oscillator TS-382F/U. (1) Connect TS-382F/U betweenpins 3
(b) Multimeter ME-26B/U. and 4 of A22J1. Connect the ME-
(c) Spectrum Analyzer TS-723A/U. 30A/U across the TS-382F/U out-
(d) Handset H-138/U. put.
(e) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A. (2) Set TS-382F/U for an output fre-
(f) Voltmeter, Meter ME-30A/U. quency of 500 cps. Adjust the
(2) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT TS-382F/U for a 1-millivolt indi-
connector J2. cation on the ME-30A/U. (Maintain
(3) Remove module A23. this level for each frequency set-
(4) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO ting.)
connector. (3) Connect the TS-723A/U between
(5) Set the front panel controls of the A22J3 and ground. Press the push-
receiver-transmitter as follows: to-talk switch. Measure the audio
(a) BAND switch at 30-52. distortion. Repeat the procedure
140
given above for 300 cps, 2 kc, and
3 kc. Normal test results for each
setting is 3.5 percent. Normal out-
put signal level for each setting is
1.4 volts rms.
(4) If the audio distortion output level
is found to be greater than the pre-
scribed levels, proceed to c below.
c. Faulty Part Isolation.
(1) Set the TS-382F/U to 1 kc, and ad-
just its output for a l-millivolt rms
indication on the ME-30A/U.
(2) With the push-to-talk switch pres-
sed, measure the voltages at the
points listed in the charts in a and
b below. Compare them with the
normal signal and dc vo1tages
listed.
Point of measurement Millivolts (rms)
Q1 base ----------------------- 0.86

Q1 emitter -------------------- 0.65
Q1 collector ------------------- 15
Q2 base --------------— ------- 15
Q2 emitter ---------— ---------- 11 Figure 74. Module A22, parts location.
Q2 collector ------------------ 158
Q3 base -----------—---—---- 155
Q3 emitter --------—-----—-- 138 (b) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
Q3 collector ------------------ 1.4 volts (c) Handset H-138/U.
1.4 volts (d) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A.
(2) Connect AN/URM-43A to ANT con-
(b) Dc voltage chart. nector J2.
Point of measurement Volts (de)
Q1 base --—------------------- 6.0 (b) Tuning knobs for 30.00 mc.
Q1 emitter --—---------------- 6.3
Q1 collector -------------------- 3.5
Q2 bcse ---— ------------------- 5.9 (4) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO
Q2 emitter ------— ------------ 6.0 connector.
(JZ collector-------------------- 2.7
Q3 base -—-----— -------------- 5.9
(5) Press the push-to-talk switch.
Q3 emitter -------------------- 6.0 b. 150-CVS Tone Test.
Q3 collector-------— ----------- 2.8 (1) Connect the ME-26B/U between
A23J3 and ground.
(3) After replacing a faulty part, re- (2) Adjust R12 for an ME-26B/U indi-
peat the procedure given in b above. cation of 0.8 volt.
(4) Replace A23. (3) Adjust the AN/USM-26 to indicate
150 cps and connect it between
92. Isolating Trouble in Module A23 A23J3 and ground.
(fig. 7 and 76) (4) Adjust R3 to obtain a 150-cps indi-
a. Preparation. cation on the AN/USM-26.
(1) Prepare the following equipment: (5) If the prescribed levels are not ob-
(a) Frequency Meter AN/USM-26. tained, proceed to c below.
141
c. Faulty Part Isolation.
(1) Measure the voltages at the points
listed in the charts in (a) and (b)
below. Compare them with the nor-
mal signal and dc voltages listed.
Note: Make all voltages to ground.
Point of measurement Millivolts (rma)
Q1 bese -------------------- 39
Q1 emitter ----------------- 35
Q1 collector ---------------- 2.0 volts
Q2 emitter ----------------
Jo ---------— ------------ 8:
(b) DC voltage chart.
Point of measurement Volts (dc )
Q1 bese ---------------------- 8.9

Q1 emitter ------------------- 9.2
Q1 collector --------— -------- 6.0
Q2 bsee -------------------- 9.2
Q2 emitter -------------------- 9.4
Q2 collector ----------------- 6.0
J3 ------------------------- 2.7
(2) After replacing a faulty part, re- Figure 75. Module A 23, parts location.
peat b above.
b. Performance Test.
(1) Disconnect the ME-30A/U from the
TS-382F/U and connect it between
(fig. 5 and 76)
a. Preparation. (2) Adjust the TS-382F/U for a 10-
(1) Prepare the following equipment: millivolt indication on the ME-
(a) Audio Oscillator TS-382F/U. 30A/U.
(b) Voltmeter, Meter ME-30A/U. (3) Connect the ME-26B/U between
(c) Multimeter ME-26B/U. contact 7 of squelch relay K3 and
(2) Connect the TS-382F/U between ground. The ME-26B/U indication
A25J3 and ground. should be infinity.
(3) Connect the ME-30A/U across the (4) Slowly increase the TS-382F/U
TS-382F/U output. level until the ME -26 B/U indicates
(4) Set the TS-382F/U frequency to O ohms.
150 cps and the level to 20 milli- (5) The ME-30A/U indication should
volts, as indicated by the ME- be 20 millivolts ±5.
30A/U. (6) If the indication obtained in (5)
(5) Set the ME-26B/U to indicate ohms above exceeds the limits, adjust the
(R x 1K. TS-382F/U level to obtain a 20-
(6) Remove module A21. millivolt indication on the ME-
(7) Set the front panel controls of the 30A/U. Adjust R15 until the ME-
receiver-transmitter as follows: 26 B/U indicates 0 ohms.
(a) BAND switch at 30-52. (7) Increase the TS-382F/U level to
(b) Tuning knobs for 30.00 mc. obtain a 50-millivolt indication on
(c) Function switch at RETRANS. the ME-30A/U.
142
(8) Increase the TS-382F/U frequency peat the procedure give n in b
to 160 cps. The ME-26B/U indica- above.
tion should remain zero. (4) Replace A21.
(9) Increase the TS-382F/U frequency
to 170 cps. The ME-26B/U inica- 94. Isolating Trouble in Module A25
tion should be infinity. (fig. 4 and 77)
(10) Deere as e the TS-382F/U fre- a. Preparation.
quency to 140 cps. The ME-26B/U (1) Prepare the following equipment:
indication should be zero. (a) Audio Oscillator TS-382F/U.
(11) Decrease the TS-382F/U fre- (b) Voltmeter, Meter ME-30A/U.
quency to 130 cps. The ME -26 B/U (c) Spectrum Analyzer TS-723A/U.
indication should be infinity. (d) Handset H-138/U.
c. Faulty Parts Isolation. (e) Rf Wattmeter AN/URM-43A.
(1) Set the TS-382F/U frequency to (f) Multimeter ME-26B/U.
150 cps and the level to 20 milli- (2) Remove module A21.
volts at A24J1 pins 1 and 2. (3) Connect the AN/URM-43A to ANT
(2) Measure the voltages at the points connector J2.
listed in the charts in (a) and (b) (4) Connect the H-138/U to an AUDIO
below. Compare them with the nor- connector.
mal signal and dc voltages listed. (5) Set the front panel controls of the
(a) Signal voltage chart. (a) BAND switch at 30-52.
(b) Tuning knobs for 30.00 mc.
(6) Connect the TS-382F/U between
Q1 base -—--------——--—--- 1.8 A25J3 and ground. Connect the ME-
Q1 emitter ------------------- 2.1
Q1 aollector --—— ------------ 48 30A/U across the TS-382F/U out-
Q2 base ----—---—-----—---- 2.2 put.
Q2 emitter -—--—----— ------ 2.1 (7) Adjust the TS-382F/U frequency
Q2 collector ----— ------------ 0
Q3 base -—------—----— ----- 48 to 1 kc and the level to 0.25 volt
Q3 aalktor ------------------ 600 as indicated by the ME-30A/U.
Q4 base ---— --------------- 540
Q4 emitter ------------------- 0 b. Audio Amplifier Distortion and Output
Q4 collector --—------------- 90 Test.
J2-3 -—---— ----------------- 90 (1) Connect the ME-30A/U to A25J4
and adjust the front panel VOLUME
(b) DC voltage chart. control to obtain an ME-30A/U in-
Point of meaaurament Volta (de)
dication of 1 volt. Maintain this
level for each setting.
Note: If the l-volt audio output level
J2-1 ---—-—--———-----—- 10 cannot be obtained, proceed to c below.
Q1 base -.----—---.—-.---- 9.1
Q1 emitter —---—----— ----- 9.3 (2) Connect the TS-723A/U to A25J4,
Q1 aollector -----—--— ------ 8.3 and measure the audio distortion.
Q2 base -—--— ------------ 9.1 Repeat the procedure above for
Q2 emitter ---------------- 9.3
Q2 aalleator -——----------- 0 300 cps, 2 kc, and 3 kc. The normal
Q3 base -----------— ------ 8.3 result should be less than 3 percent
Q3 emitter --—-----— ------ for each setting.
Q3 oalleator --—------------ ::
Q4 bnse -————— --------- -0.12 c. Faulty Part Isolation.
Q4 emittar -——---------- 0 (1) Set the TS-382F/U to 1 kc, and ad-
Q4 oahatar ----—— -------- 4.4 just its output for a 0.25 -volt-rms
Q5 bnse — -—--—--—---- 4.4
Q5 emitter ——-— ------ 4.6 indication on the ME-30A/U at
Q6 aalleotor ———--— ------ 0 A25J3.
(2) Adjust the VOLUME control for a
(3) After replacing a faulty part, re- 1-volt rms signal at A25J4.
143
(3) Measure the voltages at the points (4) After replacing a faulty part, re-
listed in the charts in (a) and (b) peat the procedures given in a and
below. Compare them with the nor- b above.
mal signal and dc voltages listed. (5) Replace A21.
Note: Make all voltages to ground.
(a) Signal voltage chart. 95. Selector Mechanism Disassembly
Procedure
(fig. 78)
Disassemble the gear train only to the
J3 -------------------------- 250 degree required to remove the defective
‘Q1 base ---—----—— --------- 230
Q1 emitter -----------— ------ 230 part.
Q1 collector ----------------- 0 a. Remove the selector mechanism from
Q2 base ------------— -------- 12 the receiver-transmitter (para 48).
Q2 emitter --------—----—--- 7.8
Q2 collector ------------------ 3.35 volts b. Remove taper pin (48) from arm as-
1 volt sembly (49) and remove arm assembly
(49). Remove taper pin (13) from stop (14)
(b) Dc voltage chart. and remove stop (14).
Note: Setscrews (47) and (15) are not supplied
Point of measurement Volts (de) with the selector mechanism, but are used to se-
cure arm assembly (49) and stop (14) to their re-
spective shafts while drilling replacement parts
Q1 base ----------------------- 4.1 (para 96).
Q1 emitter ------------—--—-- 0
Q1 collector ------------------- 4.25 c. Disconnect spring (32) from spring
Q2 base ----------------------- 8.5 retainer (18) and move arm assembly (33)
Q2 emitter --------------—-- 8.7 away from shaft assembly (30) to facilitate
Q2 collector ----— ------------ 0.67
removal of shaft assembly (30).
144
d. Remove retaining ring (12) fromshaft Remove ball plunger (38) from hous-
assembly (30) and remove shaft assembly ing assembly (59).
(30), with thrust washer (31) and 0-rings Note: To facilitate disassembly, remove shaft
(29), from housing assembly (59). assemblies (57) and (69) in one operation (j below).
e. Remove pin (5) that secures arm (4) j. Remove retaining rings (45) and (46)
to housing assembly (59) and remove arm that secure shaft assemblies (57) and (69)
(4) and spring (6). Remove bushing (3) to housing assembly (59).
from sleeve (2). k. Remove shaft assemblies (57) and (69)
f. Remove taper pin (7) that secures with all attached parts from housing as-
sleeve (2) to shaft assembly (16) and re- sembly (59).
move sleeve (2). Note: Treat shaft assembly (57), together with
Note: The setscrew (8) is not supplied with the gear segment (81) and gear (82), as one unit. Do
selector mechanism, but is used to secure sleeve not disassemble further.
(2) to shaft assembly (16) during drilling of re-
placement parts (para 96). l. Remove sleeve (85) from spring re-
g. Remove retaining ring (1) that se- tainer (18) and disconnect spring (83) from
cures shaft assembly (16) to housing as- spring retainer (18).
sembly (59). Remove shaft assembly (16) m. Remove screw (50) and lockwasher
and thrust washer (17) from housing as- (51) that secure mask assemblies (53) and
sembly (59). (54) to shaft assembly (57).
h. Remove retaining ring (34) that se- n. Remove 0-rings (52), mask assem-
cures arm assembly (33) to retaining arm blies (53) and (54), thrust washer (58),
(35). Remove arm assembly (33) and spring 0-rings (55), and spring (56) from shaft
(32). assembly (57).
145
o. Remove spring (83) and sleeve (84) that point in the procedure in which the
from mask assembly (53). defective part is replaced.
p. Remove retaining ring (79) that se- Caution: Before inserting a taper pin
cures arm assembly (78) to shaft assem- through a gear and a shaft, be sure that
bly (57). Remove arm assembly (78). the taper pin holes are aligned correctly.
q. Remove spring (56) from arm assem- Failure to observe this procedure will
bly (78) . cause serious damage to the parts.
r. Remove thrust washer (70) from shaft Note: Make all pinning operations with the dials
assembly (69). Remove taper pin (68) from set at 30.00 mc. Setscrews (8), (15), (47), and (66)
are not supplied with the selector mechanism, but
gear (67); then remove O-rings (65) and are used to secure replacement parts to gear shafts
gear (67) from shaft assembly (69). while drilling. After the pinning operations are
Note: Setscrew (66) is not supplied with the se- completed, remove the setscrewe. Setscrews (43)
lector mechanism, but it is used to secure gear and (64) are supplied with the selector mechanism
(67) to shaft assembly (69) during drilling of re- and are to be replaced in coupler assemblies (44)
placement parts (para 96). and (63).
s. Remove taper pin (42) and setscrew a. When replacing the bushing (2 3), apply
(43) that secure coupler assembly (44) and locktite (American Sealants, Grade C, or
remove coupler assembly (44). equal) to the outside shank of the bushing
t. Remove retaining ring (41) that se- (23) and press it into the housing assembly
cures antibacklash gear assembly (36) to (59).
housing assembly (59) and remove anti- b. If replacement is required, replace
backlash gear assembly (36) and thrust yoke (40), worm (21), screw (39), and gear
washer (37). (20) at one time. Install thrust washer (22)
Note: Do not disassemble the anti backlash gear into housing assembly (59). Insert gear
assembly (36) further. (20) and worm (21) into housing assembly
u. Remove retaining ring (71) that se- (59) with yoke (40) positioned through
cures gear arm (72) and spur gear (73) housing assembly (59). Place thrust
to stud (74). Remove gear arm (72), spur washer (19) over gear (20), and secure in
gear (73), and thrust washer (77). place with plate (11), lockwasher (10), and
v. Remove taper pin (62) and setscrew screw (9).
(64) that secure coupler assembly (63) to Note: After gear (20) and worm (21 ) are secured
in housing assembly (59), yoke (40) extension
shaft assembly (75) and remove coupler should be 0.462 inch ±0.015. Measure this distance
assembly (63). from the centerline of the outer drill hole in the
w. Remove retaining ring (61) from shaft yoke (40) to the casting of the housing assembly
(59).
assembly (75). Remove shaft assembly (75)
c. Place thrust washer (70) on shaft as-
and thrust washer (76) from housing as-
sembly (59). sembly (69), insert shaft assembly (69)
x. Remove screw (9), lockwasher (10), through housing assembly (59) and secure
and plate (11) that secure thrust washer in place with retaining ring (46). Install
(19), gear (20), worm (21), and thrust arm assembly (49) on shaft assembly (69)
washer (22) to housing assembly (59). and secure taper pin (48).
Note. Do not disassemble screw (39), yoke (40),
d. Apply locktite (American Sealants,
and worm (21). Grade C, or equivalent) to threads of ball
y. Remove screw (28), lockwasher (27), plunger (38). Install ball plunger (38) into
flatwasher (26), and remove housing (25) housing assembly (59); bottom the ball
from housing assembly (59). Remove lamp plunger (38) against cam (80) on shaft as-
(24) from housing (25). If bushing (23) is sembly (69) and then back off ball plunger
damaged, press it from housing assembly one-eighth to one-quarter turn.
(59). Note: Before meshing the anti backlash gear as-
sembly (36) with another gear, advance the anti-
backlash floating gear two teeth, then mesh.
96. Selector Mechanism Reassembly e. Place thrust washer (76) on shaft as-
Procedure sembly (75). Insert shaft assembly (75)
(fig. 78) through housing assembly (59) and secure
In reassembling the gear train, start at with retaining ring (61). Position coupler
146
assembly (63) on shaft assembly (75). Align o. Position arm assembly (33) on retain-
the holes; insert and secure taper pin (62) ing arm (35) and secure in place with re-
and setscrew (64). taining ring (34).
f. Place thrust washer (77) and spur p. Install two O-rings (29) on shaft as-
gear (73) on stud (74) with the gear hub sembly (30). Place thrust washer (31) over
facing away from housing assembly (59). retaining ring side of shaft assembly (30).
Mount gear arm (72) on stud (74) while q. Insert shaft assembly (30) through
obtaining gear mesh between gear arm (72) housing assembly (59) and secure in place
and shaft assembly (75). Install retaining with retaining ring (12).
ring (71) on stud (74) and secure. Check r. Place stop (14) on shaft assembly (30),
all parts for freedom of operation. align the taper-pin holes, and insert and
g. Install thrust washer (37) on shaft of secure taper pin (13).
antibacklash gear assembly (36), and in- s. Install one end of spring (32) on arm
sert antibacklash gear assembly (36) into assembly (33) and the other on spring re-
housing assembly (59). Install and secure tainer (18).
retaining ring (41) on shaft of antibacklash t. Place sleeve (2) on shaft assembly
gear assembly (36). Place coupler assem- (16) and align the taper pin holes. Insert
bly (44) on shaft of antibacklash gear as- and secure taper pin (7). Place bushing (3)
sembly (36), align the holes, and secure on sleeve (2).
taper pin (42) and setscrew (43). U . Secure spring (6) to housing assembly
h. Connect spring (56) to arm assembly (59) and arm (4). Position the forked end
(78). of arm (4) in bushing (3) and secure arm
i. Install arm assembly (78) to shaft (4) to housing assembly (59) with pin (5).
assembly (57) and secure with retaining Crimp over both ends of pin (5).
ring (79). Install O-rings (55) on shaft as - Note: Upon completion of the above assembly
sembly (57). procedures, check all parts for freedom of move-
ment.
j. Place sleeve (84) and spring (83) on
mask assembly (53). Place sleeve (85) on v. Place lamp (24) in housing (25), posi-
spring retainer (18). tion housing (25) in bushing (2 3), and secure
k. Place mask assemblies (53 and 54) in place with flat washer (26), lockwasher
on shaft assembly (57); secure in place (27), and screw (28).
with screw (50) and lockwasher (51). w. When replacing spacer (60) into hous -
l. Install O-rings (52) on mask assembly ing assembly (59), apply Locktite (Ameri-
(53) and position spring (56) in place on can Sealant, Grade C, or equivalent) to
shaft assembly (57). Slide thrust washer threads.
(58) on retainer ringside of shaft assembly
(57), then position shaft assembly (57) into 97. Disassembly and Reassembly of Interval
housing assembly (59) and secure in place Oscillator Module A10
with retaining ring (45). (fig. 79)
m. Install gear (67) on shaft assembly a. Disassembly.
(69) with hub of gear (67) facing inboard. (1) Remove two panhead screws (10)
Insert taper pin (68) and secure gear (67) and lockwashers (9) that secure
on shaft assembly (69). Install two O-rings cover (8) to header-shield assem-
(65) on shaft assembly (69). bly (7). Remove the cover.
n. Place thrust washer (17) on shaft as - (2) Remove retaining ring (16) that
sembly (16). Insert shaft assembly (16) secures coupling assembly (1) in
through housing assembly (59) and mesh header-shield assembly (7) and re-
gear on shaft assembly (16) with gear seg- move coupling assembly (1).
ment (81) on shaft assembly (57). Secure (3) Remove two screws (2) and two
shaft assembly (16) in place with retaining screws (4) that support bearing as-
ring (1). semblies (3 and 14) to header-
Note: During the drilling operation (if required)
maintain 0.015 inch end play in shaft assembly (16) shield assembly (7) and remove the
and 0.005 inch end play in shaft assembly (30). two support bearing assemblies.
147
Figure 78. Selector mechanisrn, exploded view.
148
1 Retaining ring 23 Bushing 43 Setscrew 64 Se~crew
2 Sleeve 24 Lamp 44 Coupler assembly 65 O-ring
3 Bushing 25 Housing 45 Retaining ring 66 Setscrew
4 Arm 26 Flat washer 46 Retaining ring 67 Gear
5 Pin 27 Lockwasher 47 Setscrew 68 Taper pin
6 Spring 28 Screw 48 Taper pin 69 Shaft assembly
7 Taper pin 29 O-ring 49 Arm assembly 70 Thrust washer
8 Setscrew 30 Shaft assembly 50 Screw 71 Retaining ring
9 Screw 31 Thrust washer 51 Lockwasher 72 Gear arm
10 Lockwasher 32 Spring 52 O-ring 73 Spur gear
11 Plate 33 Arm assembly 53 Mask assembly 74 Stud
12 Retaining ring 34 Retaining ring 54 Mask assembly 75 Shaft assembly
13 Taper pin 35 Retaining arm 55 O-ring 76 Thrust washer
14 stop 36 Anti backlash gear 56 Spring 77 Thrust washer
15 Setscrew assembly 57 Shaft assembly 78 Arm assembly
16 Shaft assembly 37 Thrust washer 58 Thrust washer 79 Retaining ring
17 Thrust washer 38 Ball plunger 59 Housing assembly 80 Cam
18 Spring retainer 39 Screw 60 Spacer 81 Gear segment
19 Thrust washer 40 Yoke 61 Retaining ring 82 Gear
20 Gear 41 Retaining ring 62 Taper pin 83 Spring
21 Worm 42 Taper pin 63 Coupler assembly 84 Sleeve
22 Thrust washer 85 Sleeve
Figure 78 - Continued.
(4) Remove four panhead screws (13), (2) Install two support bearing assem-
four hexagonal nuts (4) and eight blies (3 and 14) on header-shield
washers (12), securing board as- assembly (7) and secure with four
semblies (6 and 11) to h e a de r- panhead screws (2 and 15).
shield assembly (7) and remove the (3) Posit ion coupler assembly (1)
two board assemblies. through support bearing assem-
b. Assembly. blies (3 and 14). Secure it with re-
(1) Install board assemblies (6 and 11) tainer ring (16).
on header-shield assembly (7) and (4) Install cover (8) on header-shield
secure them with four panhead assembly (7) and secure it with two
screws (13), eight lockwashers (5 panhead screws (10), and lock-
and 12), and four hexagonal nuts washers (9).
(4) .
149
150
1 Coupling assembly 9 Lockwasher
2 Screw 10 Panhead screw
3 Support bearing assembly 11 Board assembly
4 Hexagonal nut 12 Washer
5 Washer 13 Panhead screw
6 Board assembly 14 Support bearing assembly
7 Header-shield assembly 15 Screw
8 Cover 16 Retaining ring
Figure 79. Module A10, exploded view.
151
COLOR CODE MARKING FOR MILITARY STANDARD RESISTORS
COMPOSITION-TYPE RESISTORS WIREWOUND-TYPE RESISTORS
Equal Width Band Double Width Signifies

BAND A— Signifies Composition-Type BAND A—
Wire-wound Resistor
COLOR CODE TABLE

BAND A BAND B BAND C BAND D
FIRST SECOND RESISTANCE
COLOR SIGNIFICANT CO1OR SIGNIFICANT COLOR MULTIPLIER COLOR TOLERANCE
FIGURE FIGURE (PERCENT)
BLACK o BLACK o BLACK 1
BROWN 1 BROWN 1 BROWN 10
RED 2 RED 2 RED 100
ORANGE 3 ORANGE 3 ORANGE 1,000
YEL1OW 4 YELLOW 4 YELLOW 10,000 SILVER ‘~ 10
GREEN 5 GREEN 5 GREEN 100,000 GOLD ==5
BLUE 6 BLUE & BLUE 1,000,000
PURPLE PURPLE
7 7
(VIOLET) (VIOLET)
—
GRAY 8 GRAY 8 SILVER 0.01
WHITE 9 WHITE 9 GOLD 0.1
EXAMPLES OF COLOR CODING

BAND BAND
Figure 80. MIL STD resistor color code.
152
Figure 85.
161
Figure 86.
163
Figure 87.
165
APPENDIX
REFERENCES
TA 11-17 Signal Field Maintenance Shops

TA 11-100 (11-17) Allowances of Signal Corps Expendable Supplies for Signal Field
Maintenance Shops.
TM 11-1257 Signal Generator AN/URM-48
TM 11-5057 Frequency Meter AN/USM-26
TM 11-5097 Spectrum Analyzers TS-723A/U, TS-723B/U, and TS-723C/U
TM 11-5129 Oscilloscopes AN/USM-50A, B, and C
TM 11-5133 Radiofrequency Wattmeter AN/URM-43A
TM 11-5551E R. F. Signal Generator AN/URM-25F
TM 11-5820-398-10 Operator’s Manual: Radio Set AN/PRC-25
TM 1l-5820-398-20 Organizational Maintenance Manual: Radio Set AN/PRC-25
TM 11-5820-398-20P Organizational Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools
List: Radio Set AN/PRC-25
TM 11-5820-398-35P Field and Depot Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools
List: Radio Set AN/PRC-25
TM 1l-6625-200-12 Operation and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Multimeters
ME-26A/U and ME-26B/U
TM 1l-6625-261-12 Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Audio Os-
cillators TS-382A/U, TS-382B/U, TS-382D/U, TS-382E/U,
and TS-382F/U
TM 1l-6625-320-12 Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Voltmeter,
Meter ME-30A/U and Voltmeters, Electronic ME-30 B/U and
ME-30C/U
TM 1l-6625-400-12 Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Meter, Mod-
ulation ME-57/U
169
INDEX
Paragraph Page Paragraph Page
Additional equipment required: Fourth echelon:

Fourth echelon testing procedures--- 53 67 Maintenance, scope --------------- 46 61
Third echelon maintenance --------- 36 42 Testing procedures:
Alignment: Additional equipment required --- 53 67
Power amplifier tank module A2 ---- 43 59 Frequency accuracy test -------- 59 79
Sidestep oscillator module A20------ 45 60 General ----------------------- 52 67
Tuning capacitor: Material required -------------- 53 67
C1 50 66 Maximun signal plus noise-to-
C2---------------------------- 51 67 noise test ------------------- 60 83
Variable frequency oscillator module Receiver, test:
A9 ----------------------------- 44 60 Audio output power --------- 61 85
Amplifier, power, A29, theory --------- 19 23 Catching range ------------- 63 91
Antenna: Distortion _________________ 65 99
Dummy, fabrication --------------- 54 68 Sensitively ----------------- 62 87
Loading network, theory ----------- 21 25 Squelch sensitivity ---------- 64 95
Audio: Summary of test data ----------- 67 105
Amplifier, receiver, module A25, System distortion test ---------- 58 75
theory -------------------------- 10 12 Test equipment required -------- 53 67
And control chassis A27, removal Tone oscillator frequency test --- 57 73
and replacement ----------------- 41 54 Tools required ----------------- 53 67
Output power test, receiver -------- 61 85 Transmitter power output test--- 56 71
Frequency:
Capacitor, alignment:
Accuracy test --------------------- 59 79
C1 ------------------------------- 50 66
C2 Synthesizer system, theory ---------
51 67 29 35
Catching range test, receiver ---------- Discriminator module A11 ------
63 91 26
First mixer module A14 -------- 22
Chassis A27, audio and control, removal
If. amplifier module A18-------- 27 32
and replacement -------------------- 41 54
Second mixer module A12------- 26 30
Comparator, phase, module A17, theory 28 33
Theory ----------------------- 5 5
Converter, dc-to-dc, module A1, theory 31 37 Test, tone oscillator --------------- 57 63
Dc-to-dc converter module A1, theory-- 31 37 Front panel, removal and replacement-- 47 61
Disassembly:
General, fifth echelon maintenance ----- 70 106
Interval oscillator module A10------ 97 147
Selector mechanism --------------- Generator, 1-mc spectrum, module A15,
95 144 28
theory ----------------------------- 23
Discriminator, frequency synthesizer
system, module A11, theory --------- 29 35 If. amplifier:
Distortion test: Frequency synthesizer system,
Receiver ------------------------- 65 99 module A18, theory -------------- 27 32
System --------------------------- 58 75 Receiver, module A21, theory ------ 9 8
Distribution, power ------------------- 33 40 Index of publications ------------------ 2 3
Dummy antenna, fabrication ----------- 54 68 Inspection, physical ------------------ 55 69
Equipment required: Interval oscillator module A10:
Disassembly ---------------------- 97 147
Additional:
Theory --------------------------- 24 28
Fourth echelon testing pro-
Ipa, transmitter, module A6, theory ---- 18 23
cedures --------------------- 53 67
Third echelon maintenance ------ Isolating trouble:
36 42
Test: Module:
A1---------------------------- 71 106
Fourth echelon testing pro- A2---------------------------- 72 107
cedures --------------------- 53 67 A3---------------------------- 73 109
Third echelon maintenance ------ 36 42 A4---------------------------- 109
73
Fabrication of test cables and dummy A5---------------------------- 74 112
antenna ---------------------------- 54 68 A6---------------------------- 75 114
Fifth echelon maintenance: A7---------------------------- 76 116
General -------------------------- 70 106 A8---------------------------- 77 118
Scope ---------------------------- 68 106 A9---------------------------- 78 120
53-mc filter A13, theory -------------- 25 30 A10--------------------------- 79 123
Filter, 53-mc, theory ----------------- 25 30 A11-------------------------- 80 125
First: A12--------------------------- 81 127
Mixer, frequency synthesizer A13--------------------------- 82 128
system, module A14, theory ------ 22 26 A14--------------------------- 83 130
Rf amplifier: A15--------------------------- 84 131
Module A3, theory ------------- 6 7 A16--------------------------- 85 131
Transmitter, module A8, theory 16 19 A17--------------------------- 86 132
170
A18--------------------------- 87 133 A12:
A19--------------------------- 88 135 Frequency synthesizer system
A20--------------------------- 89 136 second mixer, theory --------- 26 30
A21--------------------------- 90 138 Isolating trouble --------------- 81 127
A22--------------------------- 91 140 A14:
A23--------------------------- 92 141 Frequency synthesizer system
A24--------------------------- 93 142 first mixer, theory ----------- 22 26
A25--------------------------- 94 143 Isolating trouble --------------- 82 128
Power amplifier circuit ------------ 39 52 A15:
Third echelon --------------------- 38 45 Isolating trouble --------------- 83 130
1-mc spectrum generator,
Localizing troubles, third echelon ----- 38 45 theory ---------------------- 23 28
A16:
Maintenance: Isolating trouble --------------- 84 131
Fifth echelon: Voltage regulator, theory ------- 30 36
General ----------------------- 70 106 A17:
Scope ------------------------- 68 106 Isolating trouble --------------- 85 131
Fourth echelon, scope ------------- 46 61 Phase comparator, theory ------ 28 33
Third echelon, scope -------------- 34 42 A18:
Material required, fourth echelon test- Frequency synthesizer system if.
ing procedures --------------------- 53 67 amplifier, theory ------------ 27 32
Maximum signal plus noise-to-noise Isolating trouble --------------- 86 132
ratio test -------------------------- 60 83 A19:
Mechanism, selector: Isolating trouble --------------- 87 133
Disassembly ---------------------- 95 144 Quarter-wave network, theory--- 14 16
Reassembly ---------------------- 96 146 A20:
Mixer, receiver, module A5, theory ---- 8 8 Isolating trouble - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 88 135
Modulation test, transmitter ---------- 57 73 Sidestep oscillator:
Module: Alignment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 45 60
A1: Theory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 14 16
Dc-to-dc converter, theory ----- 31 37 A21:
Isolating trouble --------------- 71 106 Isolating trouble - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 89 136
A2: Receiver if. amplifier theory---- 9 8
Isolating trouble --------------- 72 107 A22:
Power amplifier tank, alignment 43 59 Isolating trouble - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 90 138
A3: Speech amplifier-limiter, theory 12 14
First rf amplifier, theory ------- 6 7 A23:
Isolating trouble --------------- 73 109 Isolating trouble --------------- 91 140
A4: Tone, generator, theory - - - - - - - 13 16
Second rf amplifier, theory ----- 7 8 Isolating trouble --------------- 92 141
A5: Tone squelch, theory ---------- 11 12
Receiver mixer, theory --------- 8 8 Isolating trouble --------------- 94 143
A6: Receiver audio amplifier, theory 10 12
Isolating trouble --------------- 75 114 Motherboard, synthesizer:
Transmitter ipa, theory -------- 18 23 Removal ------------------------- 42 54
A7: Replacement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 42 54
Isolating trouble --------------- 76 116
Transmitter second rf amplifier, Network, antenna loading, theory ------ 21 25
theory ----------------------- 17 22 28
1-mc spectrum generator module A15--- 23
A8:
Oscillator:
Isolating trouble --------------- 77 118 45 60
A20, alignment
Transmitter first rf amplifier, 28
Interval, module A10, theory ------- 24
theory ---------------------- 16 19 73
Tone, frequency test -------------- 57
A9:
Output test, transmitter power - - - - - - - - 56 71
Isolating trouble --------------- 78 120
Variable frequency oscillator: Phase comparator module A17 --------- 28 33
Alignment ----------------- 44 60 Physical tests and inspection ---------- 55 69
Theory -------------------- 15 17 Points, test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 32 38
A10: Power:
Interval oscillator: Amplifier:
Disassembly --------------- 97 147 A29 ------------------------- 19 23
Isolating trouble ------------ 79 123 Circuit, isolating trouble ------- 39 52
Theory -------------------- 24 28 Tank module A2:
A11: Alignment ----------------- 43 59
Frequency synthesizer system Theory -------------------- 20 24
discriminator, theory -------- 29 35 Distribution ---------------------- 33 40
Isolating trouble --------------- 80 125 Output test, transmitter ------------ 56 71
171
Tank, power amplifier, module A2 ----- 20 24

Publications, index ------------------- 2 3
Test:
Quarter-wave network, module A19, Cables, fabrication --------------- 54 68
theory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 14 16 Data, summary 67 105
Reassembly, selector mechanism ------ 96 146 Equipment required:
Receiver: Fourth echelon - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53 67
Audio: Third echelon 36 42
Amplifier module A25, theory --- 10 12 Points 32 38
Output power test -------------- 61 85 Setup 37 44
Catching range test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63 91 Testing procedures, fourth echelon,
Distortion test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65 99 general - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52 67
Tests, physical ---------------------- 55 69
If. amplifier module A21, theory ---- 9 8
Mixer module A5, theory ---------- 8 8 Theory:
Sensitivity test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62 87 Dc-to-dc converter module A1------ 31 37
Receiving signal path, theory ---------- 3 4 53-mc filter 25 30
Regulator, voltage, module A16, theory First rf amplifier module A3 ------- 6 7
30 36
Removal: Frequency synthesizer system - - - - - 5 5
Audio and control chassis A27 ------ 41 54 Discriminator module A11 ------ 29 35
Front panel ---------------------- 47 61 First mixer module A14 -------- 22 26
Selector-mechanism --------------- 48 64 If. amplifier, module A18 ------ 27 32
Synthesizer motherboard - - - - - - - - - - 42 54 Second mixer module A12------- 26 30
Repairs, third echelon, scope --------- 40 53 Interval oscillator module A10 ------ 24 28
Replacement: 1-mc spectrum generator module
Audio and control chassis A27 ------ 41 54 A15 23 28
Front panel ---------------------- 47 61 Phase comparator module A17------ 28 33
Selector mechanism --------------- 48 64 Power amplifier A29 -------------- 19 23
Synthesizer motherboard - - - - - - - - - - 42 54 Power amplifier tank module A2 ---- 20 24
If amplifier: Quarter-wave network module A19-- 14 16
First, module A3, theory ---------- 6 7 Receiver:
Second, module A4, theory --------- Audio amplifier module A25----- 10 12
7 8
If. amplifier module A21-------- 9 8
Scope : Mixer module A5 8 8
Fifth echelon maintenance ---------- 68 106 Receiving signal path -------------- 3 4
Fourth echelon maintenance -------- 46 61 Second rf amplifier module A4 7 8
Manual -------------------------- 1 3 Sidestep oscillator module A20 ----- 14 16
Third echelon: Speech amplifier-limiter module A22 12 14
Maintenance ------------------- 34 42 Transmitter:
Repairs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 40 53 First rf amplifier module A8---- 16 19
Second: Ipa module A6 18 23
Mixer, frequency synthesizer system, Second rf amplifier module A7 -- 17 22
module A12, theory - - - - - - - - - - - - - 26 30 Transmitting signal path ----------- 4 5
If amplifier: Tone:
Module A4, theory ------------- 7 8 Generator module A23---------- 13 16
Transmitter, module A17, theory 17 22 Squelch module A24 11 12
Selector mechanism: Variable frequency oscillator module
Disassembly ---------------------- 95 144 A9 ----------------------------- 15 17
Reassembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 96 146 Voltage regulator module A16 ------ 30 36
Removal and replacement ---------- 48 64 Third echelon:
Sensitivity test: Additional equipment required ------ 36 42
Receiver ------------------------- 62 87 Isolating troubles 38 45
Squelch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 64 95 Maintenance, scope 34 42
Sidestep oscillator module A20: R e p a i r s , s c o p e 40 53
Alignment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 45 60 Test equipment required ----------- 36 42
Theory -------------------------- 14 16 Test setup - 37 44
Signal path: Tone generator module A23, theory ---- 13 16
Receiving, theory ----------------- 3 4 Tone oscillator frequency test --------- 57 73
Transmitting, theory -------------- 3 4 Tone squelch module A24, theory ------ 11 12
Signal plus noise-to-noise ratio, maxi- Tools required, fourth echelon testing
mum, test ------------------------- 60 83 procedures 53 67
Speech amplifier-limiter module A22 --- 12 14 T rans mitt er:
Squelch sensitivity test ---------------- 64 95 First rf amplifier module A8, theory 16 19
Summary of test data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 67 105 Modulation test 57 73
Synthesizer: Power output test 56 71
Motherboard: Second rf amplifier module A7,
Removal --------------------- 42 54 t h e o r y 17 22
Replacement ------------------ 42 54 Transmitting signal path, theory ------- 4 5
System, frequency, theory --------- 5 5 Trouble, isolating in module:
System distortion test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58 75 A 1 - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 71 106
172
A2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 72 107 A19 88 135

A3 73 109 A20 89 136
A4 73 109 A21 90 138
A5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 74 112 A22 91 140
A6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 75 114 A23 92 141
A7 76 116 A24 93 142
A8 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 77 118 A25 94 143
A9 78 120 Troubles:
A10 79 123 Isolating at third echelon 38 45
A11 80 125 Localizing at third echelon - - - - - - - - 38 45
A12 81 127 Tuning capacitor, alignment:
A13 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 82 128 C1 ------------------------------ 50 66
A14 83 130 C2 ------------------------------ 51 67
A15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 84 131 Variable frequency oscillator module A9:
A16 85 131 Alignment 44 60
A17 86 132 Theory 15 17
A18 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 87 133 Voltage regulator module A16, theory -- 30 36
173
By Order of Secretary of the Army:
EARLE G. WHEELER,
General, United States Army,
Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. C. LAMBERT,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution
Active Army:
DASA (6) Sacramento Army Dep (17)

USASA (2) Tobyhanna Army Dep (12)
CNGB (1) Lexington Army Dep (12)
CofEngrs (1) Ft Worth Army Dep (8)
TSG (1) WRAMC (1)
CSigO (5) Trans Tml Cored (1)
CofT (1) Army Tml (1)
USA CD Agcy (1) POE (1)
USAATBD (1) OSA (1)
USC ONARC (5) AFIP (1)
ARADCOM (2) AMS (1)
ARADCOM Rgn (2) Army Pic Cen (2)
OS Maj Cored (3) USA Mob Spt Cen (1)
OS Base Cored (2) USA Strat Comm
LOGCOMD (2) Cored (4)
MDW (1) USA Elct Mat Agcy (25)
Armies (2) Chicago Proc Dist (1)
Corps (2) USARCARIB Sig Agcy (1)
Instl (2) except Sig Fld Maint Shops (3)
Ft Monmouth (63) USA Corps (3)
USATC AD (2) JBUSMC (2)
USATC Armor (2) Units org under fol TOE:
USATC Engr (2) 11-7 (2)
USATC FA (2) 11-16 (2)
USATC Inf (2) 11-57 (2)
USA Mat Comd (5) 11-98 (2)
USA Elct Comd (5) 11-117 (2)
USA Msl Cored (4) 11-155 (2)
Svc Colleges (2) 11-157 (2)
Br Svc Sch (2) 11-500 (AA-AE) (4)
GENDEP (OS) (2) 11-557 (2)
Sig Sec, GENDEP (5) 11-587 (2)
Sig Dep (OS) (12) 11-592 (2)
Army Dep (2) except 11-597 (2)
NG: State AG (3).

USAR: None.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 320-50.
174 U.S. GOVERNMET PRINTING OFFICE : 1 9 9 4 - 3 0 0 - 4 2 1 ( 8 2 6 2 1 )

PIN: 018817-000

TM 11-5820-398-35

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 11-5820-398-35

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 11-5820-398-35

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 11-5820-398-35

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL MANUAL

FIELD AND DEPOT

RADIO SET AN/PRC-25

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

When Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25

DON’T TAKE CHANCES!

Field and Depot Maintenance Manual

98. Applicability of Depot Inspection Stand- (2) TM 11-5820-398-20, Organizational Main-

Equipment Federal stock No. Technical manual.

Switch, tig~e, singl&pole, singl~throw ------------------------------------------------- 5930-65%1517 1

Figure 79.1. Test cables No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3.

RADIO SET AN/PRC-25

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,2 3

Section I. BLOCK DIAGRAM ANALYSIS

3. Receiving Signal Path mixer stage is coupled through the 11.5-

Section II. CIRCUIT ANALYSIS

Figure 3. Receiver mixer module A5, schematic diagram.

Figure 5. Tone squelch module A 2 4 , s c h e m a t i c d i a g r a m .

Figure 6. Speech amplifier limiter module A22, schematic diagram.

Figure 7. Tone generator module A23, schematic diagram.

emitter. Inductor L3 and capacitor A8 amplifies the rf input from variable

Figure 12. Transmitter second rf amplifier module A7, schematic d i a g r a m ,

c. The tuning controls tune inductors 41.45-mc to 64.45-mc output of the

Figure 17. First mixer module A14, schematic diagram.

the filter properly and minimize varia- center-tapped secondary winding

condition induces a voltage in the tors Q1 and Q2 switch rapidly from

Figure 26. Dc-to-dc converter module A1, schematic diagram.

Section I. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING TECHNIQUES

a. Test Equipment. Battery, Dry BA-386/ TM 11-5820-398-10

Figure 27. Typical module extender for module A20.

Section II. THIRD ECHELON TROUBLESHOOTING

37. Test Setup

(1) Remove Battery Box CY-2562/

Item Indication Probable trouble Procedure

e. Defective relay K3 or relay ?. Check continuity between termi-

either band when the hmction continuity between contacts 3

in the H-138/U with. the iimction 32 and 88). (Normal indication

(5) Pi~k of Jll and pill G of

E of J19. Ch6ck physical con-

(2) Troubleshooting chart for transmitter section of RT-505/PRC-25.

3 o rf Power output indicated on the i. Defeotive C 1 ---------------- R. Higher echelon maintenance

dicates infinity. Check physical

is at SQUELCH. Receiver oper-

Section III. THIRD ECHELON REPAIRS

Figure 33. Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25, top view, modules removed.

Section IV. THIRD ECHELON ALIGNMENT

43. Alignment of Power Amplifier

Section I. FOURTH ECHELON REPAIRS

Figure 35. Receiver-Transmitter, Radio RT-505/PRC-25, bottom v i e w , d i s a s s e m b l y .

Figure 39. Tuning capacitor assembly.

Section II. FOURTH ECHELON ALIGNMENT

49. General trol settings unless specifically directed.

Section III. FOURTH ECHELON TESTING PROCEDURES

52. General umns; then perform each specific test

the test procedures.

netic Shielding MX-1761/G or its

Nomenclature Federal stock No.

Inolosure, Electromagnetic 4940-542-0002